Comtech EF Data SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual

SDM-2020
Satellite Modulator
Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Revision 7
SDM-2020
Satellite Modulator
Installation and Operation Manual
Comtech EF Data is an ISO 9001
Registered Company.
Part Number MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Revision 7
June 30, 2002
Copyright © Comtech EF Data, 2002. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161.
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM-2020M.IOM
Customer Support
Contact the Comtech EFData Customer Support Department for:
• Product support or training
• Information on upgrading or returning a product
• Reporting comments or suggestions concerning manuals
A Customer Support representative may be reached at:
Comtech EFData
Attention: Customer Support Department
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
480.333.2200 (Main Comtech EFData Number)
480.333.4357 (Customer Support Desk)
480.333.2161 FAX
or, E-Mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at:
[email protected]
Contact us via the web at www.comtechefdata.com.
To return a Comtech EF Data product (in-warranty and out-of-warranty) for repair or
replacement:
1. Request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from the Comtech
EFData Customer Support Department.
2. Be prepared to supply the Customer Support representative with the model
number, serial number, and a description of the problem.
3. To ensure that the product is not damaged during shipping, pack the product in its
original shipping carton/packaging.
4. Ship the product back to Comtech EF Data. (Shipping charges should be
prepaid.)
For more information regarding the warranty policies, see Warranty, p. xiv.
ii
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1.
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................1–1
1.1
Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 1–1
1.2
Assemblies.................................................................................................................................... 1–4
CHAPTER 2.
PRODUCT DATA SPECIFICATION ...............................................................2–1
2.1
Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 2–1
2.2
Dimensional Envelope ................................................................................................................ 2–6
CHAPTER 3.
INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................3–1
3.1
Unpacking.................................................................................................................................... 3–1
3.2
Installation ................................................................................................................................... 3–4
CHAPTER 4.
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ..........................................................................4–1
4.1
External Connections.................................................................................................................. 4–1
4.2
Proper Operations for Emissions (CE) ..................................................................................... 4–5
CHAPTER 5.
FRONT PANEL OPERATIONS ......................................................................5–1
5.1
Front Panel .................................................................................................................................. 5–1
5.2
LED Indications .......................................................................................................................... 5–2
5.3
Front Panel Keypad .................................................................................................................... 5–3
5.4
Menu System ............................................................................................................................... 5–4
5.5
Menu Tree.................................................................................................................................... 5–6
5.6
Openning Screen ......................................................................................................................... 5–7
5.7
Initial Default Setting ............................................................................................................... 5–49
5.8
Revision Emulation Operation ................................................................................................ 5–50
iii
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CHAPTER 6.
DATA INTERFACES .......................................................................................6–1
CHAPTER 7.
RS-422 PARAELLEL/SERIAL INTERFACE ..................................................7–1
CHAPTER 8.
LOW VOLTAGE DIFFERENTIAL SIGNAL (LVDS)........................................8–1
CHAPTER 9.
ASI/RS-422 DATA INTERFACE .....................................................................9–1
CHAPTER 10.
ECL/HSSI DATA INTERFACE......................................................................10–1
CHAPTER 11.
G.703 DATA INTERFACE ............................................................................11–1
CHAPTER 12.
SMPTE-310 DATA INTERFACE...................................................................12–1
CHAPTER 13.
ASI/LVDS DATA INTERFACE......................................................................13–1
CHAPTER 14.
FULLY ACCESSIBLE SYSTEM TOPOLOGY (FAST) OPTIONS ................14–1
APPENDIX A.
REMOTE CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS....................................................... A–1
iv
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Figures
Figure 1-1. Modulator Block Diagram ................................................................................................ 1–1
Figure 2-1. Dimensional Envelope of Units Prior to September 1, 1999 ............................................ 2–6
Figure 2-2. Diemensional View for Units with Improved Chassis ...................................................... 2–7
Figure 3-1. Installation of the Optional Mounting Bracket, KT/6228-1.............................................. 3–3
Figure 3-2. Rear View of SDM-2020M Rack Installed ........................................................................ 3–4
Figure 3-3. Typical Data Interface Module.......................................................................................... 3–5
Figure 4-1. Rear Panel ......................................................................................................................... 4–1
Figure 5-1. Front Panel View............................................................................................................... 5–1
Figure 5-2. Keypad .............................................................................................................................. 5–3
Figure 5-3. SDM-2020 Modulator Menu Tree..................................................................................... 5–6
Figure 6-1. 204 Byte Parallel Format................................................................................................... 6–2
Figure 6-2. 204 Byte Serial Format ..................................................................................................... 6–2
Figure 7-1. RS-422 Interface Module PCB ......................................................................................... 7–3
Figure 8-1. LVDS Interface Module PCB ........................................................................................... 8–3
Figure 9-1. ASI/RS-422 Interface Block Diagram .............................................................................. 9–2
Figure 9-2. ASI Module Assembly ...................................................................................................... 9–2
Figure 10-1. 187 Byte (No framing) Serial Format ........................................................................... 10–4
Figure 10-2. 188 Byte Serial Format ................................................................................................. 10–4
Figure 10-3. 204 Byte Serial Format ................................................................................................. 10–4
Figure 10-4. 204 Byte DBS Serial Format..........................................................................................10-5
Figure 10-5. ECL/HSSI Connector, Pin Locator ............................................................................... 10–7
Figure 10-6. Nominal Interface Timing ........................................................................................... 10–10
Figure 10-7. Interface Timing .......................................................................................................... 10–10
Figure 11-1. G.703 Interface Block Diagram .................................................................................... 11–2
Figure 11-2. G.703 Interface Assembly (PCB).................................................................................. 11–3
Figure 11-3. Co-Located Modulator and Demodulator ..................................................................... 11–9
Figure 12-1. SMPTE-310M Interface Block Diagram ...................................................................... 12–2
Figure 12-2. Module Assembly, Part No. AS/6175-2........................................................................ 12–3
Figure 13-1. ASI/LVDS Interface Block Diagram ............................................................................ 13–2
Figure 13-2. ASI/LVDS Jumper Selection ........................................................................................ 13–5
v
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Tables
Table 1-1. Minimum/Mximum Data and Symbol Rates...................................................................... 1–3
Table 1-2. Comtech EF Data Module Part Numbers ........................................................................... 1–4
Table 1-3. Comtech EF Data Part Numbers for Data Interface Modules ............................................ 1–5
Table 2-1. General Specifications........................................................................................................ 2–1
Table 2-2. Environmental and Physical Specifications........................................................................ 2–3
Table 2-3. Modulator Specifications.................................................................................................... 2–4
Table 4-1. Rear Panel Connectors........................................................................................................ 4–1
Table 4-2. Remote Control Connector Pinout (J1) .............................................................................. 4–2
Table 4-3. Faults Status Relays Connector Pinout (J2)........................................................................ 4–3
Table 5-1. LED Indicators ................................................................................................................... 5–2
Table 5-2. Revision Emulation .......................................................................................................... 5–50
Table 6-1. Minimum Software Requirements...................................................................................... 6–1
Table 6-2. 204 Data and Timing .......................................................................................................... 6–3
Table 7-1. RS-422 Interface Specifications ......................................................................................... 7–2
Table 7-2. DVB Interface Connector Pinout (J3) ................................................................................ 7–5
Table 7-3. EIA-530 Serial Interface Connector Pinout (J4) ................................................................ 7–6
Table 7-4. Auxiliary Connector Pinout (J5)......................................................................................... 7–7
Table 8-1. LVDS Specifications .......................................................................................................... 8–2
Table 8-2. DVB Interface Connector Pinout, J3 RX Out (Demodulator Only)................................... 8–5
Table 8-3. DVB Interface Connector Pinout, J4 TX IN ...................................................................... 8–6
Table 8-4. Auxiliary Connector Pinout................................................................................................ 8–7
Table 9-1. ASI/RS-422 Specifications................................................................................................. 9–3
Table 9-2. RS-422 Connector Pinout (Per EIA-530), J5 ..................................................................... 9–5
Table 10-1. Framing Format Summary...............................................................................................10-2
Table 10-2. Terrestrial Transport Protocols ........................................................................................ 10–3
Table 10-3. HSSI/EIA-613 Interface Connector Pinout (J3) ............................................................. 10–5
Table 10-4. Definition of Signals....................................................................................................... 10–8
Table 10-5. HSSI General Specifications .......................................................................................... 10–9
Table 10-6. Transmit Timing Parameters ........................................................................................ 10–11
Table 10-7. Receive Timing Parameters.......................................................................................... 10–11
Table 10-8. Signal Definition............................................................................................................10-12
Table 10-9. Fault Signal Definitions................................................................................................ 10–13
Table 11-1. G.703 Applicable Documents......................................................................................... 11–4
Table 11-2. Specifications Summary ................................................................................................. 11–5
Table 11-3. Auxiliary Connector, J5................................................................................................ 11–11
Table 12-1. Specification Summary................................................................................................... 12–1
Table 12-2. Auxiliary Interface Connector, J5................................................................................... 12–6
Table 13-1. ASI/LVDS Specifications............................................................................................... 13–3
Table 13-2. Modulator/Demodulator Jumper Selection..................................................................... 13–6
Table 13-3. LoopBack Connections....................................................................................................13-7
Table 13-4. Auxiliary Connector Pinout (J5)...................................................................................... 13–9
vi
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
About this Manual
This manual describes the operation and maintenance of the Comtech EF Data
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator. This is a technical document intended for earth station
engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the operation and maintenance of
the Comtech EF Data SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator.
Related Documents
Comtech EF Data Specification, SP/5611 SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Conventions and References
Cautions and Warnings
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used to indicate other
unsafe practices or risks of property damage.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
IMPORTANT indicates a statement that is associated with the task
being performed. .
IMPORTANT
Metric Conversion
Metric conversion information is located on the inside back cover of this manual. This
information is provided to assist the operator in cross-referencing English to Metric
conversions.
Recommended Standard Designations
Recommended Standard (RS) Designations have been superseded by the new designation
of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). References to the old designations are
shown only when depicting actual text displayed on the screen of the unit (RS-232, RS485, etc.). All other references in the manual will be shown with the EIA designations
(EIA-232, EIA-485, etc.) only.
vii
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Trademarks
Product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
Reporting Comments or Suggestions Concerning this Manual
Comments and suggestions regarding the content and design of this manual will be
appreciated. To submit comments, please contact the Comtech EF Data Technical
Publications Department: [email protected]
Overview of Changes to Previous Edition
Changes made to Rev. 6 are as follows:
Revised manual format to comply with the current Comtech EF Data standards.
Chapter 5: Front Panel Operation – Revisied the chapter to include version 9.1.2. Revised
Table 5-2 to include version 9.1.2, FW/5613-1AG.
Chapter 14: FAST – Updated procedures to comply with customer support requirements.
Appendix A – Updated remote control operation to include FW.5613-1AG and FW/56132AG.
viii
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Electrical Safety
The SNM-1010L Modem has been shown to comply with the following safety standard:
•
EN 60950: Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including
electrical business machines
The equipment is rated for operation over the range 100 - 240 volts AC. It has a
maximum power consumption of 40 watts, and draws a maximum of 400 mA.
Observe the following instructions:
Fuses
The SNM-1010L is fitted with two fuses - one each for line and neutral connections.
These are contained within the body of the IEC power inlet connector, behind a small
plastic flap.
• For 230 volt AC operation, use T0.75A, 20mm fuses.
• For 115 volt AC operation, use T1.25A fuses, 20mm fuses.
FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY,
ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.
Environmental
The SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator must not be operated in an environment where the
unit is exposed to extremes of temperature outside the ambient range 0 to 50°C (32 to
122°F), precipitation, condensation, or humid atmospheres above 95% RH, altitudes (unpressurised) greater than 2000 metres, excessive dust or vibration, flammable gases,
corrosive or explosive atmospheres.
Operation in vehicles or other transportable installations that are equipped to provide a
stable environment is permitted. If such vehicles do not provide a stable environment,
safety of the equipment to EN60950 may not be guaranteed.
Installation
The installation and connection to the line supply must be made in compliance to local or
national wiring codes and regulations.
The SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator is designed for connection to a power system that has
separate ground, line and neutral conductors. The equipment is not designed for
connection to power system that has no direct connection to ground.
ix
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
The SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator is shipped with a line inlet cable suitable for use in
the country of operation. If it is necessary to replace this cable, ensure the replacement
has an equivalent specification.
Examples of acceptable ratings for the cable include HAR, BASEC and HOXXX-X.
Examples of acceptable connector ratings include VDE, NF-USE, UL, CSA, OVE,
CEBEC, NEMKO, DEMKO, BS1636A, BSI, SETI, IMQ, KEMA-KEUR and SEV.
International Symbols:
Symbol
Definition
Symbol
Definition
~
Alternating Current
Protective Earth
Fuse
Chassis Ground
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
In accordance with the Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91/263/EEC,
this equipment should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications
Network.
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
In accordance with European Directive 89/336/EEC, the SNM-1010L Modem has been
shown, by independent testing, to comply with the following standards:
Emissions:
EN 55022 Class B - Limits and methods of measurement of radio
interference characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.
(Also tested to FCC Part 15 Class B)
Immunity:
EN 50082 Part 1 - Generic immunity standard, Part 1: Domestic,
commercial and light industrial environment.
x
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Additionally, the SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator has been shown to comply with the
following standards:
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-9
EN 61000-4-11
EN 61000-4-13
Harmonic Currents Emission
Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
ESD Immunity
EFT Burst Immunity
Surge Immunity
RF Conducted Immunity
Power frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
Voltage Dips, Interruptions, and Variations Immunity
Immunity to Harmonics
In order that the Modem continues to comply with these standards, observe
the following instructions:
IMPORTANT
•
Connections to the transmit and receive IF ports (BNC female connectors) should
be made using a good quality coaxial cable - for example RG58/U (50 Ω or
RG59/U (75 Ω).
•
All 'D' type connectors attached to the rear panel must have back-shells that
provide continuous metallic shielding. Cable with a continuous outer shield
(either foil or braid, or both) must be used, and the shield must be bonded to the
back-shell.
•
The equipment must be operated with its cover on at all times. If it becomes
necessary to remove the cover, the user should ensure that the cover is correctly
re-fitted before normal operation commences
xi
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
European EMC Directive
In order to meet the European Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
(EN55022, EN50082-1), properly shielded cables for DATA I/O are required. More
specifically, these cables must be shielded from end-to-end, ensuring a continuous
ground shield.
The following information is applicable for the European Low Voltage Directive
(EN60950):
<HAR>
!
Type of power cord required for use in the European Community.
CAUTION: Double-pole/Neutral Fusing
ACHTUNG: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung
International Symbols:
Alternating Current.
Fuse.
Safety Ground.
Chassis Ground.
Note: For additional symbols, refer to “Cautions and Warnings” listed earlier in this
preface.
xii
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Warranty Policy
This Comtech EF Data product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship
for a period of two year from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, Comtech
EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective.
For equipment under warranty, the customer is responsible for freight to Comtech EF
Data and all related custom, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible
for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the customer.
Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express,
Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.
Limitations of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper installation or
maintenance, abuse, unauthorized modification, or operation outside of environmental
specifications for the product, or, for damages that occur due to improper repackaging of
equipment for return to Comtech EF Data.
No other warranty is expressed or implied. Comtech EF Data specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular purpose.
Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are the buyer's sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech EF
Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
Disclaimer
Comtech EF Data has reviewed this manual thoroughly in order that it will be an easy-touse guide to your equipment. All statements, technical information, and
recommendations in this manual and in any guides or related documents are believed
reliable, but the accuracy and completeness thereof are not guaranteed or warranted, and
they are not intended to be, nor should they be understood to be, representations or
warranties concerning the products described. Further, Comtech EF Data reserves the
right to make changes in the specifications of the products described in this manual at any
time without notice and without obligation to notify any person of such changes.
If you have any questions regarding your equipment or the information in this manual,
please contact the Comtech EF Data Network Customer Support Department.
xiii
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Preface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally blank.
xiv
Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION
SDM-2020
Satellite
Modulator
1.1
OVERVIEW
The SDM-2020 is a programmable, variable-rate satellite modulator used for digital
video and high-speed data applications. The modulator supports open network modes
compliant with the ETSI EN 300 421/prEN 301 210 specification for Digital Video
Broadcasting (DVB) by satellite.
A general block diagram for the modulator is shown in Figure 1-1.
PLUG-IN
SYNCH
AND
RANDOMIZE
RS CODER
AND
INTERLEAVER
VITERBI CODER
AND
MAPPING
DATA FILTER
AND
MODULATOR
DATA
USER
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
M&C
SYNTHESIZER
TO/FROM
SYNCH AND RANDOMIZE
RS CODER AND INTERLEAVER
VITERBI CODER AND MAPPING
DATA FILTER AND MODULATOR
SYNTHESIZER
REMOTE PORT
AND FAULTS
Figure 1-1. Modulator Block Diagram
1-1
TX
IF
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Introduction
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
The modulator utilizes a plug-in data interface module installed in the rear of the chassis.
The data interface module provides flexible adaptation to the various physical and
electrical interfaces found in the communications industry.
The modulator utilizes Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), Comtech EF Data’s
new feature for immediate implementation of different options through the user interface
keypad. FAST enable on-location upgrades of the operating feature set—in the rack—
without removing a unit from the setup. This feature employs a unique access code to
enable configuration of the available hardware. The access code can be purchased at any
time from Comtech EF Data. Once obtained, the access code is entered into the unit
through the front panel keypad or the rear remote port. When service requirements
change, the modulator can be upgraded to meet the new requirements within minutes
after confirmation by Comtech EF Data.
The data rate of the modulator is programmable from 1.5 to 100 Mbit/s depending upon
the data interface and the maximum symbol rate is 37.5 Msym/s. The minimum symbol
rate is limited by the minimum 1.5 Mbit/s data rate. Modulation formats include QPSK,
8PSK, and 16QAM. Operation is based upon the DVB/DBS standard for QPSK and
8PSK.
Table 1-1 lists the minimum and maximum data and symbol rates for each code rate. See
the specifications section for the maximum data rate limits by framing types.
1-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Introduction
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 1-1. Minimum/Maximum Data and Symbol Rates
Code Rate
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 5/6
QPSK 7/8
Framing
Type
188
188
188
188
188
Minimum
Data Rate
(bps)
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
Maximum
Data Rate
(bps)
34,558,823
46,078,431
51,838,235
57,598,039
60,477,941
Minimum
Symbol Rate
(sym/s)
1,627,659
1,220,744
1,085,106
976,595
930,091
Maximum
Symbol Rate
(sym/s)
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
8PSK 8/9
188
188
188
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
69,117,647
86,397,059
92,156,863
813,829
651,063
610,372
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
188
188
1,500,000
1,500,000
92,156,863
92,156,863
542,553
465,045
33,333,333
28,571,428
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 5/6
QPSK 7/8
204
204
204
204
204
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
37,500,000
50,000,000
56,250,000
62,500,000
65,625,000
1,500,000
1,125,000
1,000,000
900,000
857,142
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
8PSK 8/9
204
204
204
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
75,000,000
93,750,000
100,000,000
750,000
600,000
562,500
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
204
204
1,500,000
1,500,000
100,000,000
100,000,000
500,000
428,571
33,333,333
28,571,428
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 5/6
QPSK 7/8
None (187)
None (187)
None (187)
None (187)
None (187)
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
34,375,000
45,833,333
51,562,500
57,291,667
60,156,250
1,636,363
1,227,272
1,090,909
981,818
935,064
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
8PSK 8/9
None (187)
None (187)
None (187)
1,500,000
1,500,000
1,500,000
68,750,000
85,937,500
91,666,667
818,181
654,545
913,636
37,500,000
37,500,000
37,500,000
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
None (187)
None (187)
1,500,000
1,500,000
91,666,667
91,666,667
545,454
467,532
33,333,333
28,571,428
1-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Introduction
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
The modulator incorporates concatenated error correction coding for improved signal
quality. With concatenated coding, an outer Reed-Solomon Codec is used in tandem with
an inner Viterbi or trellis-type Codec. The Reed-Solomon coding is DVB (based on 204,
188, t=8 type code), while the Viterbi and trellis codes are based upon a constraint length
K = 7 convolutional coding. This combination significantly reduces the required
operating power of the satellite system.
The modulator is a complete, self-contained unit in a standard, one-unit (1U) 19-inch
(48.26 cm) rack-mountable enclosure. It includes a backlit LCD display and a standard
Comtech EF Data 6-button keypad for user control.
A status and control port (available through a 9-pin D connector at the rear of the chassis)
provides either serial EIA-232 or EIA-485 for remote control applications. A second rearpanel 9-pin D connector provides fault/alarm status.
The unit is designed to meet stringent safety and RF emissions standards, including CE
Mark certification.
1.2
ASSEMBLIES
1.2.1
MODULATOR
The modulator consists of the assemblies listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2. Comtech EF Data Module Part Numbers
Part Number
Description
PL/8200-1
SDM-2020 Top Assembly
PL/3995-39
IF Module, 75Ω
PL/5612
Modulator Assembly
PL/3995-40
IF Module, 50Ω
KT/8200
Chassis Assembly
1-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Introduction
1.2.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
DATA INTERFACES
Data interface assemblies are listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3. Comtech EF Data Part Numbers for Data Interface Modules
Part Number
Description
PL/5805
RS422 Data Serial/Parallel Data Interface
PL/5806-2
ECL/HSSI Serial Data Interface (For TX only)
PL/5807
ASI/RS422 (Asynchronous Serial Interface and Serial Data Interface)
PL/5814
LVDS-DVB Serial/Parallel Data Interface
PL/6168
G.703 Data Interface
PL/6175-2
SMPTE 310M Data Interface
PL/8160
ASI/LVDS Interface
The data interface is a plug-in module. As new interfaces are developed, the related
information will be added to this manual. All data interfaces are safety rated to SELV
(IEC 950, Paragraph 1.2.8.5).
For additional data interface availability, contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support.
1.2.3
FAST OPTIONS
Certain options are enabled using Comtech EF Data’s FAST feature. The software and
other requirements for the FAST options are also listed in this appendix. Options include:
•
8PSK
•
16QAM
•
Original Equipment Manufacture “Liquid Crystal Display” (OEM
LCD)
1-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Introduction
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
1-6
Chapter 2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1
SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.1
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Table 2-1. General Specifications
Parameter
Specification
Transmission Format
QPSK per EN 300 421
8PSK per prEN 301 210, optional
16QAM per prEN 301 210, optional
Data Rate/Symbol Rate
1.5 to 100 Mbit/s, in 1 bit/s steps, depending upon symbol rate and data interface.
Refer to Chapter 1 for the appropriate Data Rate.
Equivalent Serial Data Rate at
96 pin DIN
Framing 187
Framing
188
Data Rate = SR x m x CRv x (187/204), ≤ 100 Mbit/s
204
Data Rate = SR x m x CRv x (188/204), ≤ 100 Mbit/s
Data Rate = SR x m x CRv x (204/204), ≤ 100 Mbit/s
m = 2 QPSK, 3 8PSK, 4 16QAM
CRv = Viterbi/trellis code rate
CRrs = Reed-Solomon code rate
Data Rate Tolerance
Programmed rate ± 100 ppm
Modulation Type and Inner
Code Rate
QPSK: 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8
8PSK: 2/3, 5/6, 8/9
16QAM: 3/4, 7/8
Outer Code Rate
(Reed-Solomon)
RS (204, 188, t = 8)
Interleaving
Depth 12, per EN 300 421 and prEN 301 210
Spectral Shaping
Square-root raised cosine, α = 0.35 per EN 300 421 and prEN 301 210
2-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Product Data Specification
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 2-1. General Specifications (Continued)
Parameter
Specification
Energy
Dispersal
EN 300 421 and prEN 301 210 , or None
Spectral Sense
Normal or Inverted
Front Panel
Interface
Keypad + LCD with back lighting
M&C Interface
Programmable selection for EIA-232, 2-wire EIA-485 or 4-wire EIA-485, 9-pin D female connector,
serial, ASYNC
Fault/Alarm
Interface
Form C, 9-pin D, female connector
Status Relays
TX Fault, TX Alarm, Common Equipment
< 30 VAC, 42.4 Vpk-pk, or 60 VAC
Max. Current
Voltage
Unit Cooling
Exhaust fan located on the left of the unit when viewed from the rear.
Rated AC
Power Input
100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz; 1.0A at 100 VAC or 0.5A at 240 VAC. Connection universal type IEC
320.
40W typical, 65W maximum.
Note: This equipment is fitted with a wide-ranging power supply that will operate at +6% to –10% of
the rated voltage range.
IEC 950, Paragraph 1.6.5.
Power
Distribution
System
Type TN only (EN 60950 Paragraph 1.2.12.1).
Connection to
Supply
Pluggable equipment Type A (EN 60950, Paragraph 1.2.5).
Power Supply
Fuses
Double pole fused.
Note: The equipment shall not be used with single-phase three-wire and PE.
Note: Equipment which is intended for connection to the building power supply wiring via a
nonindustrial plug and socket outlet or a nonindustrial appliance coupler or both.
Fuse type 20mm 2A T-type HBC (T2A H250V)
(IEC 127, Sheet V, approved and UL recognized)
Class of
Equipment
Class 1 Equipment (EN60950, Paragraph 1.2.4): electric shock protection by basic insulation and
protective earth.
Power Supply
Hold-up
16 ms minimum at 120 VAC
DC Power
Input optional
42 to 56 VDC. 40W typical, 65W maximum.
CE
Compliance
Required
78 ms minimum at 240 VAC
2-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Product Data Specification
2.1.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ENVIRONMENTAL AND PHYSICAL SPECIFICATION
Table 2-2. Environmental and Physical Specifications
Parameter
Physical:
Size
Specification
1 U rack mount, IEC 297, DIN41494 Type.
19W x 1.75H x 14D inch
(48.26W x 4.44H x 35.56D cm)
Weight
< 15 lbs. (< 7.0 kg.)
Environmental:
Temperature
0 to +50°C (32 to 122°F), Operating
-40 to +70°C (-40 to 158°F), Storage
Humidity
< 95%, non-condensing
Note: Power supply has an operating range of 85 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz,
universal type per manufacturer’s published data sheet.
2-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Product Data Specification
2.1.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
MODULATOR SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-3. Modulator Specifications
Modulator Characteristics
TX IF Output
50 to 90 and 100 to 180 MHz, 2.5 kHz steps
-20 to +5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
(± 0.5 dB accuracy over operating temperature range)
TX IF Impedance
75Ω, 18 dB return loss minimum
Optional TX IF Impedance
50Ω, 18 dB return loss minimum
IF Output Connector
BNC, female
TX Spurious:
Modulated Carrier
-55 dBc minimum in a 4 kHz bandwidth relative to unmodulated carrier power for
all modulated carrier power levels. The measurement bandwidth is 5 to 500 MHz
excluding ± 1.4 times the symbol rate about the carrier frequency.
TX Spurious:
Unmodulated Carrier
-55 dBc minimum in a 4 kHz bandwidth, TX power level is
≤ -5 dBm. The measurement bandwidth is 5 to 500 MHz.
TX Carrier Isolation
-60 dBm maximum when TX carrier = OFF
AC Line Spurious
-36 dBc maximum
IF and Data Frequency Stability
± 10 ppm
TX Carrier Phase Noise
(Single Sideband)
Amplitude and Phase Imbalance
Max dBc/Hz
Offset from Carrier Frequency
-66
100 Hz
-76
1 kHz
-86
10 kHz
-96
100 kHz
-96
1 MHz
± 0.2 dB, maximum
± 2°, maximum
Carrier Null (Suppression)
30 dB, minimum
Sideband Suppression
30 dB minimum, when generating a single side band
carrier (Offset Mode)
Group Delay
4 ns peak-to peak maximum to 18.75 MHz, within EN 300 421 and prEN 301 210
I/Q Delay Matching
0.5 ns difference maximum to 18.75 MHz.
Jitter Tolerance Main Card
Meets ITU-T G.823 (3/93) and ITU-T G.824 (3/93)
except T1 (1.544 Mbit/s) and E1 (2.048 Mbit/s), which requires a G.703 data interface.
Jitter Transfer
< 0.5 dB peaking up to the cutoff frequency, -20 dB per decade beyond cutoff.
Nominal 3 dB cutoff is 10 Hz except E3 (34.368 Mbit/s), which is 100 Hz.
2-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Product Data Specification
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 2-4. Modulator Specifications (Continued)
Monitor & Control Characteristics
Asynchronous Serial Interface
EIA-485 (2-/4-wire), or EIA-232
Baud Rate
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 bps
Serial Format
ASCII
Data Bits
7 bits with odd/even parity
8 bits with no parity
Stop Bits
2
Parity
Odd, Even, or None
Remote Port Addressing
Range: 1 to 255
Controlled Items:
Data
Data Rate
Symbol Rate
Energy Dispersal (Scrambler) On/Off (Test Mode)
Differential Encoder (On/Off)
Framing Type (None, 188, 204)
Clock and Data Phase (Normal/Inverted)
Modulation, Coding
Modulation Type: QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM
Code Rate (Viterbi/trellis)
Spectral Mask, DVB
Carrier
TX IF Frequency
TX Output (On/Off)
TX Output Power Level
Spectral Inversion: Normal/Inverted
Test (Where Applicable)
Pure Carrier
Dual Carrier (Carrier Null)
Offset Carrier (Single Sideband)
Data Loopback (Where Applicable)
LED Test
Scrambler (On/Off)
Reset
2047 Pattern (into payload)
Data Loopback
General
Date and Time
Software/Firmware Version and Unit Identification
Display Contrast
Status
All other configuration items
Faults
Loss of Clock, or Out of Tolerance
Data Stable, all 1s (AIS), or all 0s
Loss of Synchronization
IF Synthesizers
Configuration Retention
Non-volatile
Store Configurations
10 stored with recall.
2-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Product Data Specification
2.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
DIMENSIONAL ENVELOPE
Refer to Figure 2-1 for modulator dimensional measurements. All dimensions are listed
in inches, centimeters are shown in parentheses.
14.0
(35.56)
1.75
(4.45)
19.0
(48.26)
1.25
(3.18)
Table 2-5. Dimensional Envelope of Units Prior to September 1, 1999
2-6
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Product Data Specification
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
As of September 1, 1999, SDM-2020 Modulator production units will incorporate a new and EMI
improved chassis. The new chassis is longer and includes the new Comtech EF Data logo. All
units returning from the field may have the new chassis installed if warranted by the repair. See
Figure 2-2.
16.12 [40.94]
1.70 [4.32]
SDM-2020
TRANSMIT
TEST MO DE
TRAN SMITTER O N
POWER O N
RANSMIT
SYNC
STOR ED
1.25 [3.18]
Table 2-6. Dimensional View for Units with Improved Chassis
2-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Product Data Specification
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-8
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION
CAUTION
3.1
The equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to
damage by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Use ESD precautionary
procedures when touching, removing, or inserting PCBs.
UNPACKING
The modulator and manual are packaged in pre-formed, reusable, cardboard cartons
containing foam spacing for maximum shipping protection.
CAUTION
Do not use any cutting tool that will extend more than 1 inch
(2.54 cm) into the container. This can cause damage to the
modulator.
To remove the modulator:
1
Cut the tape at the top of the carton indicated by OPEN THIS END
2
Remove the cardboard/foam space covering the modulator
3
Remove the modulator, manual, and power cord from the carton
4
Save the packing material for storage or reshipment purposes
5
Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment
6
Check the equipment against the packing list to ensure the shipment is correct
7
Refer to Section 3.2 for installation instructions
3-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Installation
3.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
INSTALLATION
A complete modulator consists of the SDM-2020 main unit and an optional plug-in data
interface. The modulator is shipped with the data interface installed in the unit. Changing
a data interface is easily accomplished in the field and does not require disassembly of
the main unit.
Refer to applicable chapters for information on removing and installing data interface
modules.
Install the modulator as follows:
1
Optional: Install the mounting bracket in equipment rack (Figure 3-1). Install and
tighten the bracket bolts.
2
Loosen the screw with flat washer located on the left-side of modem chassis.
Mount the modem chassis into the equipment rack and slide the screw with flat
washer through the slot of the mounting bracket. Tighten the screw sufficiently to
allow the modem chassis to slide in the bracket.
3
Connect the cables to the proper locations on the rear panel.
4
Observe the modulator. The modulator powers ON automatically when the
primary power connection is made (plugged in). Before plugging in the modulator,
become familiar with the front panel operation as described in Chapter 5.
Note: If there is any problem with the installation, contact Comtech EF Data’s Customer
Support Department: [email protected]
3-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Installation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Equipment
Rack
Mounting
Rail
*
*
#10 Socket head
screw
BRACKET
BOLTS
* Support
Bracket
* Note: Components of mounting kit KT/6228-1
IDU
Figure 3-1. Installation of the Optional Mounting Bracket, KT/6228-1
3-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Installation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
3.2.1 CABLING
The following cabling instructions are generic. Comtech EF Data realizes
there are several different cabling applications for the SDM- 2020
Modulator, however, this manual cannot illustrate or described the
various installation configurations.
IMPORTANT
100-240V ~
1.5A 50-60Hz
6
T2A, 250V
J1
J2
R
E
M
O
T
E
F
A
U
L
T
4
1
Back of
Rack
J21
J3
ECL / HSSI INTERFACE
M
O
N
I
T
O
R
RF 1
Lengend
Prime Power Cord
Remote Ribbon Cable
Fault Cable
Data Interface
IF Output
Ground
5
3
2
Up Converter
Router
Figure 3-2. Rear View of SDM-2020M Rack Installed
Item #
1
2
3
4
Cable
Prime Power Cord
Remote
Fault
Data Interface,
Customer Select
Interface
5
IF Output
From
I.E.C
J1
J2
JX SERIAL
JX PARALLEL
JX AUX
CP1
6
Ground
#10-32 Stud
3-4
To
Rack Power Source
EXT PC Terminal
EXT PC Terminal
Cissco router or
equivalent
Comment
3-Pong Power Cord
9-pin D
9-pin D
Refer to Chapter 6
Data Interfaces
Upconverter or
RF Terminal
Rack Equipment
BNC
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Installation
3.2.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
DATA INTERFACES
The data interface is a removable, plug-in module that provides a terrestrial connection to
the modulator. An interface consists of a Printed Circuit Board (PCB) attached to a
faceplate. The faceplate contains connectors appropriate for the interface type, and two
captive mounting screws.
Appendix C describe the various data interfaces. After a different interface type has been
installed, the modulator recognizes the change upon power up, and defaults to valid
parameters for the new interface.
To avoid damaging the modulator, always disconnect the power before
removing or installing a data interface.
CAUTION
J3 PARALLEL
J4 SERIAL
J5 AUX
Figure 3-3 is an example of a typical data interface.
Figure 3-3. Typical Data Interface Module
3-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Installation
3.2.2.1
3.2.2.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
DATA INTERFACE REMOVAL
1
Disconnect power from the modulator.
2
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two captive screws on the faceplate
of the data interface.
3
Grasp the data interface by the faceplate handle.
4
Carefully pull the data interface out of the slot.
DATA INTERFACE INSTALLATION
1
Disconnect power from the modulator.
2
Grasp the data interface by the faceplate handle.
3
Locate the opening at the rear of the modulator.
4
Carefully align the data interface with the card guides inside the modulator and
insert the data interface into the opening.
5
Push the data interface firmly into the slot, ensuring a good connection.
6
Align the captive screws located on the faceplate with the holes on the modulator
rear panel.
7
Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws.
3-6
Chapter 4. EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
4.1
EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
The connectors for the main unit are shown in Figure 4-1 and identified in Table 4-1.
The connectors for each plug-in data interface are described in their applicable chapters.
PRIME
POWER
GROUND
FUSE HOLDER
J1 REMOTE
DATA INTERFACE CONNECTIONS
J2 FAULT
CP1 TX-IF
Figure 4-1. Rear Panel
Table 4-1. Rear Panel Connectors
Name
Ref. Desig.
Type
Function
Remote
J1
9-pin D Female
Remote control (M&C)
Fault
J2
9-pin D Female
Faults status relays
IF Output
CP1
BNC-Female
Transmit IF output
Prime Power
I.E.C
Standard
AC Power Input
GND
None
#10-32 Stud
Chassis Ground
Data Interface Connectors
See applicable chapter.
4-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
External Connections
4.1.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
REMOTE CONNECTOR AND PINOUT (J1)
The remote control connection is a 9-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of
the modulator. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security of the mating connector.
The remote connector provides a means for issuing commands and determining the unit
status. This connector provides EIA-232, EIA-485 (2-wire), and EIA-485 (4-wire)
operation. The communications protocol and the control and status commands are
described in Appendix A.
Table 4-2. Remote Control Connector Pinout (J1)
Remote Control Connector (J1) Pinout
EIA-232C
EIA-485 (2)
EIA-485 (4)
Signal
Type
Signal
Type
Signal
Type
Pin #s
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
1
RXD
O
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
TXD
I
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
N/A
N/A
+RX/+TX
I/O
+TX
I
4
GND
GND
-RX/-TX
I/O
-TX
I
5
DSR
O
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6
RTS
I
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7
CTS
O
+RX/+TX
I/O
+RX
O
8
N/A
N/A
-RX/-TX
I/O
-RX
O
9
4-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
External Connections
4.1.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FAULT CONNECTOR (J2)
The fault interface connection is a 9-pin female D connector located on the rear panel of the
modulator. Screw locks are provided for mechanical security on the mating connector.
The fault connector provides FORM-C contact closures for fault reporting. The two
FORM-C summary fault contacts are Modulator and Common Equipment. To obtain a
system summary fault, connect all of the FORM-C contacts in parallel.
Table 4-3. Faults Status Relays Connector Pinout (J2)
Signal
Function
Common Equipment Fault
Modulator Fault
Modulator Alarm
Name
CE_NO
CE_COM
CE_NC
MOD_NO
MOD_COM
MOD_NC
ALM_NO
ALM _COM
ALM _NC
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Type
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
FC
Pins Connected
Fault/
Power
Alarm OK
OFF
2-3
1-2
2-3
5-6
4-5
5-6
7-8
8-9
8-9
Note: A connection between the common (COM) and normally open (NO) contacts
indicates no fault.
4.1.3
TRANSMIT IF OUTPUT CONNECTOR (CP1)
CP1 is a BNC connector for the TX IF signal output. The output impedance is 75Ω
(50Ω optional). The output is a modulated carrier between 50 and 180 MHz.
4.1.4
AC POWER
This unit shall be operated from the type of power source indicated on
the marking label. If power source is unknown, contact the local power
company. Damage to the unit may be the result.
4-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
External Connections
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Type TN System Only (EN 60950, Paragraph 1.2.12.1) - Power Distribution System:
Power distribution system having one point directed toward the earth, the exposed
conductive parts of the installation being connected to that point by protective earth
conductors. This equipment shall not be used with single-phase three-wire (PE, TT, or IT)
type power distribution system.
The A/C power is supplied to the modulator by a standard, detachable, non-locking,
3-prong power cord. The cord connects to a fused IEC 320-type power receptacle.
Internal to the unit, color-coded wiring is used in the A/C mains as follows:
UK
Europe
USA
(BS 1363)
(CEE 7/7)
(NEMA 5-15P)
Brown
Brown
Black
Neutral
Blue
Blue
White
Ground
Green/Yellow
Green/Yellow
Green
Live
Note: Since the equipment is not fitted with an ON/OFF switch, the A/C socket-outlet shall be
installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible (EN 60950 1.7.2).
IMPORTANT
4.1.5
Before replacing the fuses in the A/C input connector, disconnect
the equipment from the power supply. Failure to do so may expose
hazardous voltages. Unplug the equipment from the local power
supply socket.
FUSE DATA
Fuse Type:
Fuse:
Littlefuse 215002 5 x 20 mm
T2A H250V
Time Delay, 2A, High Breaking Capacity
Double Pole
(Approved to IEC 127, Sheet V and Underwriters Laboratories)
Refer to input power requirements as specified in Chapter 2.
Replacing a fuse
1
Remove the fuseholder on the back of the IEC 320 style A/C input connector (Figure 4-1).
2
Replace fuse with same or equivalent rated part and/or model number.
4-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
External Connections
4.1.6
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
DC POWER (OPTIONAL)
DC power is an available option. Contact Comtech EFData’s Customer Support for
further assistance.
4.1.7
GROUND (GND) OR EARTH
A #10-32 stud is available on the rear panel for the purpose of connecting a common
chassis ground among all of the equipment.
Note: A safety ground is provided through the AC power connector.
4.1.8
LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION
4.2
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with
the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose
of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
PROPER OPERATIONS FOR EMISSIONS (CE)
To ensure compliance with the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, properly shielded cables for
Data I/O shall be used. These cables shall be doubled-shielded from end-to-end, ensuring
a continuous ground shield.
4-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
External Connections
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
4-6
Chapter 5. FRONT PANEL
OPERATIONS
5.1
FRONT PANEL
The modem front panel (Figure 5-1) enables control of modem configuration parameters
and displays the modem status.
Modulator
FAULTS
ALARMS
TRANSMIT
TRANSMIT
STORED
POWER ON
SYNC
TRANSMITTER ON
TEST MODE
ENTER
CLEAR
Figure 5-1. Front Panel View
The front panel features include:
•
32-character, 2-line LCD display
•
•
6-button keypad for local control
7- LEDs to provide overall status at a glance
All functions are accessible at the front panel by entering one of six pre-defined Function
Select categories or levels:
•
Configuration
•
Monitor
•
Faults/Alarms
•
Stored Faults/Alarms
•
Utility
5-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
LED INDICATORS
The seven LEDs on the front panel indicate:
•
General modem summary faults
•
Status
•
Alarms
The indicators are defined in Table 5-1 as follows:
Table 5-1. LED Indicators
Name
LED
Transmit
Stored
Red
Yellow
Power On
SYNC
Green
Green
Transmitter On
Green
Test Mode
Yellow
Transmit
Yellow
Description
Faults
A fault condition exists in the transmit chain.
A fault has been logged and stored.
The fault may or may not be active.
Status
Power is applied to the modem.
The modulator is synchronized to the data in the selected framing
mode. The LED is continuously On when the DVB Framing Type
is None.
Transmitter is currently On.
This indicator reflects the actual condition of the transmitter, as
opposed to be programmed condition.
Flashes when the modem is in a test configuration.
Alarms
A transmit function is in an alarm condition.
5-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FRONT PANEL KEYPAD
IMPORTANT
The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. If a key is held down for more than 1
second, the key action will repeat, automatically, at the rate of 15 keystrokes per
second. This is particularly useful when editing numeric fields, with many digits,
such as frequency or data rate.
The front panel keypad permits local operation of the modem. The keypad consists of six
keys (Figure 5-2).
ENTER
CLEAR
Figure 5-2. Keypad
Each key provides one or more logical functions. These functions are defined in the
following table.
ENTER
This key is used to select a displayed function or to execute a
modem configuration change.
CLEAR
This key is used to back out of a selection or to cancel a
configuration change which has not been executed using
[ENTER]. Pressing [CLEAR] generally returns the display to
the previous selection.
Left and Right
Diamond Keys
These keys are used to move to the next selection or to move
the cursor for certain functions.
Note: Throughout this chapter, [←] and [→] are used to
indicate left and right diamond keys.
Top and Bottom
Diamond Keys
These keys are used primarily to change configuration data
(numbers). At times, they are also used to move from one
section to another.
Note: Throughout this chapter, [↑] and [↓] are used to indicate
top and bottom diamond keys.
5-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
The modem responds by beeping whenever a key is pressed:
5.4
•
A single beep indicates a valid entry and the appropriate action was taken
•
A double beep indicates an invalid entry or a parameter is not available for
operation.
MENU SYSTEM
Note: The menus show features and options that are not available. However, they are
shown to preserve the menu structure and reserve the structure for the future. This does
not imply an intent or obligation to add these features or options in the future.
Use the Main menu in Figure 5-3 as a quick reference for accessing the modem functions.
When the modem power is applied, the base level of the menu system displays the
sign-on message:
•
Line 1 of the sign-on message is the modem model number and type.
•
Line 2 is the version number of the firmware.
The main level of the menu system is Function Select. To access this level from the
sign-on message, press the [←] or [→] keys. From the Function Select menu; select one
of the functional categories:
•
Configuration
•
Monitor
•
Faults/Alarms
•
Stored Faults/Alarms
•
Utility
Press [←] or [→] to move from one selection to another. When line 2 displays the desired
function, select that level by pressing [ENTER]. After entering the appropriate functional
level, press [←] or [→] to move to the desired function.
5-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
To view or change the modem’s configuration, enter the Configuration level from the
Function Select menu. Once in the Configuration menu, press [←] or [→] to scroll
through the Configuration menu selection:
•
Modulator
•
Demodulator
•
Interface
•
Save
•
Recall
Press [ENTER] to select the desired Configuration menu option. To view the options for
the selected configuration parameters, press [←] or [→]. To change a configuration
parameter, press [ENTER] to begin the change process.
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the parameters. After the display represents the correct
parameters, press [ENTER] to execute the change. This action initiates the necessary
programming by the modem.
To undo a parameter change prior to execution, press [CLEAR].
Notes:
1. Figure 5-3 list the front panel menu window selections.
2. Comtech EF Data recommends that selection of the desired Modem Type be
made prior to making any other setting. This procedure is located in the Utility
Modem Type menu.
3. Menus or commands that are specific to certain modem configurations are only
accessible after selecting the appropriate modem configuration. This prevents
incompatible parameters from accidentally being selected.
4. All of the windows are accessible in the Custom mode. Take caution not to select
incompatible parameters, as the modem does not shut out incompatible command
choices in the Custom mode.
5-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
MENU TREE
SELECT
CONFIGURATION
FAULTS/ALARMS
STORED FLTS/ALMS
UTILITY
MODULATOR
INTERFACE
SAVE
RECALL
MONITOR
TX INTERFACE
COMMON
MODULATOR X
TX INTERFACE X
COMMON X
CLEAR
MODULATOR
INTERFACE
SYSTEM
MOD OPTIONS
FACTORY SETUP
TX-DR
TX-SR
TX-IF FREQUENCY
TX-IF OUTPUT
TX POWER LEVEL
ENERGY DISPERSAL
CARRIER MODE
15.000000 Mbps
15.000000 Mbps
70.0000 MHz
OFF
-10.0 dBm
ON
NORMAL-MODULATED
TX CLOCK PHASE
TX DATA PHASE
2047 PATTERN
TX SYNC SELECT
TX DATA FAULT
TX CLK ACTIVITY
DVB FRAMING TYPE
INTF LOOPBACK
TX CODING FORMAT
NORMAL
NORMAL
OFF
EXT SYNC
NONE
ALARM
188
OFF
AMI
MOD POWER OFFSET
MOD SPECTRUM
POWER UP TX-IF
MODULATOR TYPE
+0.0 dB
NORMAL
LAST KNOWN
DVB-1
RS-422
LVDS
ASI/RS422
ECL/HSSI TX
G.703
SMPTE-310
ASI/LVDS
UNKNOWN
TIME/DATE
REMOTE BAUD RATE
REMOTE ADDRESS
REMOTE TYPE
YEAR DISPLAY
TEST MODE STATUS
LAMP TEST
DISPLAY CONTRAST
M&C FIRMWARE
BOOT FIRMWARE
ENCODER FIRMWARE
R/S FIRMWARE
MASTER RESET
ALARM RELAY
12:00:00 AM / 7/04/76
9600 bps / EVEN
1
RS-485 (4-WIRE)
2-DIGIT
REV EMULATION
MOD OPTIONS
MODEM SERIAL
CONFIURATION CODE - MOD
CURRENT
Figure 5-3. SDM-2020 Modulator Menu Tree
5-6
64
NORMAL
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
OPENING SCREEN
This screen is displayed whenever power is first applied to the unit:
SDM-2020 MOD
VER: 9.1.2
Press any key to go to the top level selection screen.
5.6.1
FUNCTION SELECT:CONFIGURATION
FUNCTION SELECT
CONFIGURATION
The following choices are present:
5.6.1.1
Modulator
This menu branch permits the user to fully configure the modulator.
Interface
This branch permits the user to fully configure the transmit phase of the
modulator.
Save
The user can save up to 10 different modulator configurations in the nonvolatile memory of the unit.
Recall
The user can recall the 10 different modulator configurations from the nonvolatile memory of the unit.
FUNCTION SELECT:CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR
CONFIGURATION
MODULATOR
Use this menu to configure the unit in a step-by-step process using each successive menu.
Use the [↑ ] [↓ ] arrows to make the desired selection, then press <ENTER>.
5-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.1.1.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR:TX-DR
TX-DR QPSK 1/2
15.000000 Mbps
Selections include:
QPSK 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
8PSK 2/3, 5/6, or 7/8
16QAM 3/4 or 7/8
Programming is done by either data rate or symbol rate. Data rate refers to the
equivalent serial data rate at the data interface connector. Symbol rate refers to the
modulation rate after framing, trellis (Viterbi) coding, and Reed-Solomon coding are
applied.
The framing type selection affects the symbol rate (if programming from the data rate
[TX-DR] menu), or the data rate (if programming from the symbol rate [TX-SR] menu).
If data rate is programmed, the symbol rate menu is updated to reflect the code rate and
framing selections. If symbol rate is programmed, the data rate display is similarly
updated.
Programing the modulator data rate (DR) from 1.5 to 100 Mbit/s, in 1 bit/s steps is
limited by code rate and data interface.
1
Press <ENTER> while the menu is displayed to turn OFF TX-IF Output.
2
Press <ENTER> a second time while the menu is displayed to turn ON TX-IF OUTPUT.
3
Observe the on/off status of the TRANSMITTER LED.
On entry, the current data rate is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first character.
1
Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor.
3
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
When <ENTER> is pressed to change the data rate, the transmitter is automatically turned
OFF to prevent the possible swamping of other channels.
Another menu is displayed that allows the operator to turn the transmitter ON again, simply by
pressing <ENTER>.
5-8
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.1.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR:TX-SR
TX-SR QPSK 7/8
15.000000 Msps
Selections include:
QPSK 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
8PSK 2/3, 5/6 or 7/8
16QAM 3/4 or 7/8
Use this menu to program the modulator symbol rate (SR) from 1 to 37.5, in 1 sym/s
steps, limited by code rate and data interface.
Programming is done by either data rate or symbol rate. Data rate refers to the equivalent
serial data rate at the data interface connector.
Symbol rate refers to the modulation rate after framing, trellis (Viterbi) coding, and
Reed-Solomon coding are applied.
The framing type selection affects the symbol rate (if programming from the data rate
[TX-DR] menu), or the data rate (if programming from the symbol rate
[TX-SR] menu). If data rate is programmed, the symbol rate menu is updated to reflect
the code rate and framing selections. If symbol rate is programmed, the data rate display
is similarly updated.
1
Press <ENTER> while the menu is displayed to turn OFF TX-IF Output.
2
Press <ENTER> a second time while the menu is displayed to turn ON TX-IF OUTPUT.
3
Observe the on/off status of the TRANSMITTER LED.
On entry, the current symbol rate is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first character.
1
Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor.
3
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5-9
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.1.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR:TX-IF FREQUENCY
TX-IF FREQUENCY
70.0000 MHz
Use this menu to program the modulator transmit frequency.
Range available:
50 to 180 MHz, in 2.5 kHz steps.
1
Press [ENTER] while this menu is displayed to turn OFF TX-IF Output.
2
Press [ENTER] a second time while this menu is displayed to turn ON TX-IF OUTPUT.
3
Observe the on/off status of the TRANSMITTER LED.
On entry, the current transmitter frequency is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first
character.
1
Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor.
3
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5.6.1.4
CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR:TX-IF OUTPUT
TX-IF OUTPUT
OFF
Use this menu to program the modulator output to ON, OFF, or MORE.
On entry, the current status of the output is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select ON or OFF.
2
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Additionally:
1
Press [ENTER] when MORE is displayed to show the menu for toggling TX-IF ON and OFF.
In this mode, the carrier is turned ON [↑] or OFF [↓] without having to press [ENTER].
2
Press [ENTER} a second time with this menu displayed to turn ON TX-IF OUTPUT.
3
Observe the on/off status of the TRANSMITTER LED.
5-10
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.1.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR:TX-IF POWER LEVEL
TX POWER LEVEL
-10.0 dBm
Use this menu to program the modulator output power level.
Range available:
+5 to -20 dBm, in 0.1 dBm steps.
On entry, the current transmitter power level is displayed with the flashing cursor on the
first character.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the output power level in 0.1 dB steps.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5.6.1.6
CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR:ENERGY DISPERSAL
ENERGY DISPERSAL
(SCRAMBLER) ON
Use this menu to program the energy dispersal ON or OFF.
On entry, the current status of the DVB Energy Dispersal is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select ON or OFF.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-11
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.1.7
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:MODULATOR:CARRIER MODE
CARRIER MODE
NORMAL-MODULATED
Use this menu to program the modulator for continuous wave mode. Four modes of
operation are available:
NORMALMODULATED
Normal modulated data. The Carrier Mode is in the OFF position for
data modulation.
DUAL-CW Mode
A test mode that generates a dual side-band suppressed carrier signal.
Side-bands are one-half the symbol rate from the carrier. This is used to
check the channel balance and carrier null.
OFFSET-CW
Mode
A test mode that generates a single upper side-band suppressed carrier
signal. The upper side-band is one-quarter the symbol rate from the
carrier. This is used to check the quadrature.
CENTER-CW
Mode
A test mode that generates a carrier at the current modulator frequency.
This can be used to measure the output frequency.
1
Press <ENTER> while in the NORMAL-MODULATED mode to turn OFF the TX-IF Output.
2
Press <ENTER> a second time to turn ON the TX-IF OUTPUT.
5-12
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE
CONFIGURATION
INTERFACE
Use this menu to configure the unit in a step-by-step process by using each successive
menu.
Use the [↑ ] [↓ ] arrows to make the sesired selection, then press <ENTER>.
5.6.2.1
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:TX CLOCK PHASE
TX CLOCK PHASE
NORMAL
Note:
Not shown with G.703 data interface installed. Use this menu to program the TX
Clock Phase to NORMAL or INVERT.
On entry, the current setting for the TX Clock Phase is displayed.
5.6.2.2
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select NORMAL or INVERT.
2
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:TX DATA PHASE
TX DATA PHASE
NORMAL
Use this menu to program the TX Data Phase to NORMAL or INVERT.
On entry, the current setting for the TX Data Phase is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select NORMAL or INVERT.
2
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5-13
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.2.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:2047 PATTERN
2047 PATTERN
OFF
Use this menu to program the transmitter to ON or OFF to insert a 2047 pattern instead of
the normal transmit data.
Upon entry, the current status is displayed.
5.6.2.4
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection.
2
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:TX SYNC SELECT
TX SYNC SELECT
EXT SYNC
Note: ASI/LVDS (ASI Mode) only can use CORR ON DAT.
Use this menu to program the transmitter for any one of the following methods of
synchronization:
EXT SYNC
Available only on interfaces with an external SYNC signal.
CORR ON
DAT
The external sync line is ignored. Data spec is detected by correlating the data
stream for the MPEG-2 sync pattern.
AUTO
DETECT
Automatically selects the most reliable sync indicator. The external sync line is
utilized, if available. Otherwise, the correlate on data method is used for sync.
(Available only on interfaces with an external SYNC signal.)
Upon entry, the current TX Sync Select is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection.
2
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
5-14
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.2.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:TX DATA FAULT
TX DATA FAULT
NONE
Upon entry, the current TX Data Fault that is being monitored is displayed.
1
Press a directional key to select one of the following modes:
NONE
The TX interface alarm DATA/ASI is not activated.
Alarm Indication
Signal (ASI)
Sets TX interface alarm DATA/ASI to monitor an
alarm condition of all 1s from customer data input to
the modulator.
DATA STABLE
Sets TX interface fault DATA/ASI to monitor an
alarm condition of all 1s or 0s. This is referred to as a
data-stable condition, which means that the data is
not transitioning.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection.
3
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: Detection of these conditions produces an alarm indication, not a fault.
5.6.2.6
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:TX CLK ACTIVITY
TX CLK ACTIVITY
ALARM
This parameter sets the response of the modulator when either a loss of clock activity or a
clock out-of-tolerance condition is detected. The response generates either an alarm or fault
based on the following selections:
•
Alarm (TX-IF Remains ON)
•
Fault (Shuts TX-IF OFF)
Upon entry, the new response is indicated.
Press <ENTER> to execute the change. The alarm condition is indicated for the Alarm
selection.
Note: When Fault is selected, an indication is produced that causes the redundancy
switch-over.
5-15
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.2.7
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:DVB FRAMING TYPE
DVB FRAMING TYPE
188
Note: Pressing <ENTER> in this menu turns off TX-IF Output.
Use this menu to program the DVB framing type for 188, 204, or NONE. The framing
type describes the format of the data into the modulator. The equivalent serial data rate at
the data interface connector is based upon the clock rate of the incoming data stream.
Upon entry, the current status of the DVB framing type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
When <ENTER> is pressed to change the framing type, the transmitter is automatically
turned off to prevent the possible swamping of other channels. Another menu is displayed
that allows the operator to turn the transmitter on again by pressing <ENTER>.
5.6.2.8
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:INTF LOOPBACK
INTF LOOPBACK
OFF
Note: Available with either ASI/RS422, G.703, or ASI/LVDS interface installed.
Test mode loops the input data back to the output of the terrestrial interface. Data
continues into the modulator. The yellow TEST MODE LED is illuminated when
Loopback is turned ON. (See Interface Loop Thru as specified under Utility Interface for
additional description.)
Upon entry, the current status of the Interface Loopback is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-16
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.2.9
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION:INTERFACE:TX CODING FORMAT
TX CODING FORMAT
AMI
Note: Available with G.703 interface installed.
Use this menu to program the TX coding format for one of these choices:
•
AMI
•
B8ZS
•
HDB3
•
B3ZS
On entry, the current status is TX Coding Format displayed.
5.6.3
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select ON or OFF.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
CONFIGURATION:SAVE
CONFIGURATION
SAVE
#X
Use the Configuration Save menu to program configuration parameters into memory on
the M&C. There are 10 memory locations that may be used to store specific frequently
used configuration setups.
5.6.4
1
Change the configuration parameters to the desired settings.
2
Enter the Configuration Save menu.
3
Press [↑] or [↓] to select a memory location (range = 1 through 10).
4
Press <ENTER> to execute the save.
CONFIGURATION:RECALL
CONFIGURATION
RECALL
#X
Use the Configuration Recall menu to recall a previously saved configuration setup.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select a memory location (range = 1 through 10).
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the recall.
5-17
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:FAULTS/ALARMS
Selections available:
MODULATOR
TX INTERFACE
COMMON
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to select an alarm type.
2
Press <ENTER>.
5-18
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
5.6.5.1 FAULTS/ALARMS:MODULATOR
MODULATOR
-------
-
Selections available include the following:
Fault/Alarm
IF SYNTHESIZER
DATA CLOCK SYN
This alarm is considered a
major alarm and will turn
OFF the modulator IF output
I CHANNEL
This alarm is considered a
major alarm and will turn
OFF the modulator IF output.
Q CHANNEL
AGC LEVEL
MODULE
IF MODULE
CONFIGURATION
Possible Problem and Action
Modulator IF synthesizer is faulted. This is considered a major alarm and
will turn OFF the modulator output. Return the modulator for repair.
TX data clock synthesizer fault. This fault is an indication that the internal
clock VCO has not locked to the incoming data clock, or the internal clock
synthesizer has not locked to the internal reference. Check to see that the
proper data rate has been set up and selected. Verify that the incoming data
rate matches what has been selected in the modulator. Verify the frequency
of the input data clock to be within the lock range of 100 PPM. If the inputs
to the modulator are all correct and the problem still exists, replace the
modulator and return it for repair.
Activity alarm for the I channel digital filter.An alarm in this position indicates
either a fault in the scrambler, or if the scrambler is disabled, it indicates a
loss of incoming data. If the fault is active with the scrambler turned OFF,
check to see that there is input data at the DATA I/O connector. If data is
present, the problem could be in the interface section. If the fault is active
with the scrambler turned ON, the problem could be in the modulator
section. Return the modulator for repair.
Activity alarm for the Q channel digital filter. Follow the same procedure as
for the I channel.
Output power automatic gain control level fault. Indicates that the level at
the modulator output is not the level that is programmed. Replace the
modulator and return it for repair.
Modulator module fault. Typically indicates the modulator will not
program.This could indicate a problem in the interface between the
modulator and M&C due to modulator firmware being installed incorrectly, or
a pin not making contact. Verify the modulator firmware is correctly installed.
If the problem still exists, return the modulator for repair.
IF module fault. Typically indicates the IF module is not responding.
Modulator configuration fault. Indicates the modulator cannot execute a
programmed configuration parameter.
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to make a selection.
2
Press <ENTER>.
5-19
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.5.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FAULTS/ALARMS:TX INTERFACE
TX INTERFACE
------Selections available include the following:
Fault/Alarm
FRAME SYNC
DATA STABLE/ASI
Note: ASI is an alarm,
not a switching fault.
CLOCK PLL
CLOCK ACTIVITY
FIFO
INTERFACE MODULE
DATA FORMAT
VIDEO FRAME SYNC
Possible Problem and Action
Indicates that the modulator cannot synchronize to the data in the selected
framing mode.
Data or ASI.
When data fault is selected in the Interface Configuration menu, the fault indicates
a data stable condition. This indicates the data is all 1s or 0s (i.e., data is not
transitioning).
When ASI is selected, the alarm indicates the data is all 1s from customer data
input to the modem. When None is selected in the Configuration Interface menu,
the TX Data/ASI Fault/Alarm is not activated.
Transmitter phase-locked loop fault. Indicates the transmitter Phase-Locked Loop
(PLL) is not locked.
Activity detector alarm of the selected interface TX clock. The interface will fall
back to the internal clock when this alarm is active.
Note: Refer to the Configuration Interface menu, TX CLK ACTIVITY. This menu
permits selection of a fault or an alarm indication for clock activity.
This fault indicates a data under-run/over-run condition.
Interface module fault. Indicates a problem in programming the interface. This
could indicate a problem in the M&C, or in the interface between the interface
section and M&C. Return the modulator for repair.
This fault indicates a fault with the formatted data.
Video Frame SYNC fault. This fault indicates a loss of synchronization to
incoming video data.
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to make a selection.
2
Press <ENTER>.
5-20
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.5.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FAULTS/ALARMS:COMMON
COMMON
-------
-
Selections available include the following:
Fault/Alarm
BATTERY/CLOCK
-12 VOLT
SUPPLY
+12 VOLT
SUPPLY
+5 VOLT SUPPLY
CONTROLLER
Possible Problem and Action
M&C battery voltage or clock fault. Indicates a low voltage in the memory battery.
Typically will be active when a modulator has been Hard Reset, or the firmware has
been changed.
When a Hard Reset has been executed or the firmware has been changed, this fault
will typically be active when the modulator is first turned on.
It should automatically clear as the battery charges up.
-12V power supply fault. Indicates a high or low voltage condition. Level is ± 5%.
Check for a short on the -12V line from the power supply or on the board. Check TP2
on the M&C section to verify the proper -12V monitor voltage (1.06V).
If this voltage is not correct, it will verify that the -12V supply is not at the proper level.
This would indicate the power supply is faulted. Return modulator for repair.
+12V power supply fault. Use the same procedure as with -12V fault. To verify the
+12V power supply voltage, check TP4 on the M&C. A voltage of 3.81V will be
monitored when the +12V is at the proper level.
+5V power supply fault. Use the same procedure as with -12V fault. To verify the +5V
power supply voltage, check TP5 on the M&C section. A voltage of 2.5V will be
monitored when the +5V is at the proper level.
Controller fault. Indicates loss of power in the M&C card. Typically indicates the
controller has gone through a power on-off cycle.
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to make a selection.
2
Press <ENTER>.
5-21
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.6
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:STORED FLTS/ALMS
Select MODULATOR, TX INTERFACE, or COMMON using the [←] [→] arrows, then
press <ENTER>.
The modulator stores the first 10 (Flt0 through Flt9) occurrences of fault status changes
in each of the three major fault categories. Each fault status change is stored with the time
and date of the occurrence. Stored faults may be viewed by entering the Stored Faults
level from the Function Select menu.
All stored faults may be cleared by executing the CLEAR Stored Faults? Command from
the Stored Faults level.
Stored faults are not maintained through a controller power-on reset cycle. However, the
last known time is maintained in non-volatile RAM, and upon power-down, a common
equipment fault is logged (Flt0) with that time and date. On power-up, an additional
common equipment fault is also logged (Flt1) to indicate the power-up time and date. On
power-up, the power-down and power-up times are logged as common equipment fault 0
and common equipment fault 1.
Upon entering the Stored Faults level, press [←] or [→] to move between the fault groups
and the CLEAR Stored Faults?? Selections. The time and date of the first stored fault
status (Flt0) for the selected group will be displayed alternately on line 2 of the display.
Press [↑] or [↓] to cycle through the selected group’s stored fault status (Flt0 through
Flt9). To display the fault status associated with the displayed time and date, press
[ENTER]. At this time, press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor to the fault to be
identified.
Note:
Faults are stored in time sequence, with the oldest fault status change stored in
Flt0, and the most recent in Flt9. Only the first 10 fault status changes are stored,
additional faults are ignored until the log is cleared. All stored faults, which have
not been used, indicate No Fault on the display.
5-22
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.6.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
STORED FLTS/ALMS:MODULATOR
MODULATOR
X
STORED TIME/DATE
Selections available include the following:
5.6.6.2
IF SYNTHESIZER
AGC LEVEL
DATA CLOCK SYN
MODULE
I CHANNEL
IF MODULE
Q CHANNEL
CONFIGURATION
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to make a selection.
2
Press <ENTER>.
STORED FLTS/ALMS:TX INTERFACE
TX INTERFACE X
STORED TIME/DATE
Selections available include the following:
FRAME SYNC
FIFO
DATA STABLE/AIS
INTERFACE MODULE
CLOCK PLL
DATA FORMAT
CLOCK ACTIVITY
VIDEO FRAME SYNC
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to make a selection.
2
Press <ENTER>.
5-23
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.6.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
STORED FLTS/ALMS:COMMON
COMMON
X
STORED TIME/DATE
Selections available include the following:
BATTERY/CLOCK
+12 VOLT SUPPLY
–12 VOLT SUPPLY
+5 VOLT SUPPLY,CONTROLLER
CONTROLLER
5.6.6.4
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to make a selection.
2
Press <ENTER>.
STORED FLTS/ALMS:CLEAR ??
CLEAR ??
STORED TIME/DATE
1
To clear the stored faults currently logged, press <ENTER>
2
Once the CLEAR Stored Faults/YES?? selection is displayed, press <ENTER> again to clear.
5-24
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.7
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY
CAUTION
The Utility Factory Setup menu is for Comtech EF Data service
personnel only. Unauthorized access may cause the modulator to
operate incorrectly.
Changes in the Utility menu may cause changes in other front panel
menus.
The Function Select Utility menu is divided into the following categories:
5.6.7.1
•
Modulator
•
Interface
•
System
•
Options
•
Factory Setup - (Factory Use Only)
1
Press [←] or [→] to select the desired Utility menu.
2
Press [ENTER].
3
Press [←] or [→] to select the desired function.
UTILITY:MODULATOR:MOD POWER OFFSET
MOD POWER OFFSET
+ 0.0 dB
Use this menu to “offset” the modulator output power readout in the Configuration menu.
This feature does not actually change the modulator power level. The function is to
change the actual reading to display an offset value in the monitor.
The modulator Power Offset can be set from –40.0 to +40.0 dB, in 0.1 dB increments.
Any value except 0.0 dB causes (ADJ) to be displayed in the TX Power Level screen.
5.6.7.2
UTILITY:MODULATOR:MOD SPECTRUM
MOD SPECTRUM
NORMAL
Use this menu to select NORMAL or INVERT for spectrum reversal of the I and Q
baseband channels (programmable vector rotation).
5-25
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.7.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
UTILITY:MODULATOR:POWER UP TX-IF
POWER UP TX-IF
LAST KNOWN
Use this menu to select the state of the TX-IF Output at power up. Selections include
OFF and LAST KNOWN (last known state). Upon entry, the current status of the TX-IF
Output power up state is displayed.
5.6.7.4
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to make the selection.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
UTILITY:MODULATOR:MODULATOR TYPE
MODULATOR TYPE
DVB-1
Use this menu to select a spectral mask type of DVB-1 or DVB-2:
DVB-1
This is the default mask and is the “best fit” to the ETS 300 421 mask.
DVB-2
This mask has a sharper cutoff in the transition region from 3 to 40 dB
resulting in a narrower spectrum, than DVB-1, at the 35 dB down region.
1
While in this menu, press <ENTER> to turn OFF the TX-IF Output.
2
Press [ENTER] a second time to turn ON the TX-IF OUTPUT.
5-26
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:INTERFACE
INTERFACE TYPE
XXXXXXXXXXX
Selections include:
RS-422
LVDS
ASI/RS422
ECL/HSSI TX
G.703
SMPTE 310
ASI/LVDS
UNKNOWN
1
Use the [←] [→] arrows to make a selection.
2
Press <ENTER>.
Additional data interfaces will be added to the menu as they are introduced. If an
interface is not recognized, then UNKNOWN is displayed. In this case, a later version of
firmware may be required to operate with the data interface.
5-27
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:RS422
INTERFACE TYPE
RS-422
This status-only item displays RS422 or UNKNOWN. No changes can be made from this
menu. Use [↑] or [↓]to select an interface type and press <ENTER>.
RS-422 INT SELECT
DVB (J3)
The display shows the RS422 interface type of DVB(J3) or 530 (J4). Upon entry, the
current status of the DVB type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
INTF MODE SELECT
SERIAL
Note: This item is valid only if DVB was selected from the RS422 INT SELECT menu.
The display shows the SERIAL or PARALLEL mode type. Upon entry, the current status
of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
RTS TX-IF CNTRL
OFF
This display shows the status of RTS CONTROL (either ON or OFF). The RTS
CONTROL signal can be used to turn on or off the TX-IF output.
Upon entry, the current status of RTS is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-28
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
RTS STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the status of RTS STATE (either NORMAL or INVERT ).
Upon entry, the current status of RTS is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
CTS STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the status of CTS STATE (either NORMAL or INVERT).
Upon entry, the current status of CTS is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
DM STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the status of DM STATE (either NORMAL or INVERT).
Upon entry, the current status of DM STATE is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-29
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:LVDS
INTERFACE TYPE
LVDS
This status-only item displays LVDS or UNKNOWN. No changes can be made from this
menu. Use [↑] or [↓]to select an interface type and press <ENTER>.
INTF MODE SELECT
SERIAL
This display shows the mode type SERIAL or PARALLEL. Upon entry, the current status
of the mode type is displayed.
5.6.8.3
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:ASI/RS422
INTERFACE TYPE
ASI/RS422
This status-only item displays ASI/RS422 or UNKNOWN. No changes can be made
from this menu. Use [↑] or [↓]to select an interface type and press <ENTER>.
INTERFACE SELECT
ASI
Displays the mode type ASI or RS422. Upon entry, the current status of the mode type is
displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-30
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
TX INTF FIRMWARE
FW/6220A
Press <ENTER]> to show the FW Release date.
TX INTF FIRMWARE
11/25/97
Press <CLEAR> to exit the data menu.
ASI LINK SELECT
B-LINK (J3)
This display shows the A-LINK (J4) or B-LINK (J3). Upon entry, the current status of the
mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
ASI LOOP BW
WIDE
Note: This is for ASI mode only.
This display shows the ASI Loop BW selection of either Wide or Narrow. Upon entry,
the current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-31
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
INTRFC LOOP THRU
OFF
This display shows the Interface Loop thru selection of either ON or OFF. Upon entry,
the current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
When ON is selected, input data is looped to the output of the terrestrial interface and
data continues into the modulator. This mode is indential to Interface Loopback specified
under the Configuration Interface menu; however, the yellow TEST MODE LED is not
illuminated. Conceptually, the data output is operating as a monitor point.
RTS TX-IF CNTRL
OFF
This display shows the status of RTS CONTROL either ON or OFF type. The RTS
CONTROL signal can be used to turn on or off the TX-IF output. Upon entry, the current
status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
RTS STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the RTS selection of either NORMAL or INVERT. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-32
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CTS STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the CTS selection of either NORMAL or INVERT. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
DM STATE
NORMAL
Note: RS-422 Interface Select only.
This display shows the DM selection of either NORMAL or INVERT. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
ST STATE
NORMAL
Note: RS-422 Interface Select only.
This display shows the ST selection of either NORMAL or INVERT. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-33
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8.4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:ECL_HSSI TX
INTERFACE TYPE
ECL_HSSI TX
This status-only item displays ECL_HSSI TX or UNKNOWN. No changes can be made
from this menu. Use [↑] or [↓]to select an interface type and press <ENTER>.
DTE STATUS
AVAILABLE
This display shows the DTE STATUS selection of either AVAILABLE or
UNAVAILABLE. Upon entry, the current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
Note: Available = TA asserted
Unavailable = TA unasserted
DTE TX-IF CNTRL
OFF
This display shows the DTE TX-IF CNTRL selection of either ON or OFF. With the ON
selection, the RF carrier is ON when TA is enabled, and the RF carrier is OFF when the
TA is disabled. Upon entry, the current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-34
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
DTE STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the DTE STATE selection of either NORMAL or INVERTED. Upon
entry, the current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
DCE STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the DCE STATE selection of either NORMAL or INVERTED. Upon
entry, the current status of the mode type is displayed.
5.6.8.5
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:G.703
INTERFACE TYPE
G.703
This status-only item displays G.703 or UNKNOWN. No changes can be made from this
menu. Use [↑] or [↓]to select an interface type and press <ENTER>.
INTRFC LOOP THRU
OFF
This display shows the Interface Loop Thru either in ON or OFF position. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-35
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
When ON is selected, input data is looped to the output of the terrestrial interface and
data continues into the modulator. This mode is indential to Interface Loopback specified
under the Configuration Interface menu; however, the yellow TEST MODE LED on the
front panel is not illuminated. Conceptually, the data output is operating as a monitor
point.
RTS TX-IF CNTRL
OFF
This display shows the RTS TX-IF Control is either ON or OFF. Upon entry, the current
status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
RTS STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the RTS State is either NORMAL or INVERT. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
TX INTF FIRMWARE
FW/6231–
Press <ENTER> to show the FW Release date.
TX INTF FIRMWARE
07/22/98
Press CLEAR to exit the data menu.
5-36
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8.6
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:SMPTE 310M
INTERFACE TYPE
SMPTE–310M
This status-only item displays SMPTE-310M or UNKNOWN. No changes can be made
from this menu. Use [↑] or [↓]to select an interface type and press <ENTER>.
INTRFC LOOP THRU
OFF
This display shows the Interface Loop Thru either in ON or OFF position. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
When ON is selected, input data is looped to the output of the terrestrial interface and
data continues into the modulator. This mode is indential to Interface Loopback specified
under the Configuration Interface menu; however, the yellow TEST MODE LED on the
front panel is not illuminated. Conceptually, the data output is operating as a monitor
point.
RTS TX-IF CNTRL
OFF
This display shows the RTS TX-IF Control is either ON or OFF. Upon entry, the current
status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-37
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
RTS STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the RTS State is either NORMAL or INVERT. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
TX INTF FIRMWARE
FW/nnnnnnrr
Press <ENTER> to show the FW Release date.
TX INTF FIRMWARE
xx/xx/xx
Press CLEAR to exit the data menu.
RX INTF FIRMWARE
FW/nnnnnnrr
Press <ENTER> to show the FW Release date.
RX INTF FIRMWARE
xx/xx/xx
Press CLEAR to exit the data menu.
5-38
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8.7
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:ASI/LVDS
INTERFACE TYPE
ASI/LVDS
This status-only item displays ASI/LVDS or UNKNOWN. No changes can be made from
this menu. Use [↑] or [↓]to select an interface type and press <ENTER>.
INTERFACE SELECT
ASI
Note: LVDS cannot be selected if jumper position is in RX_LVDS mode.
This display shows the mode type ASI or LVDS interface. Upon entry, the current status
of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
TX INTF FIRMWARE
FW/XXXX
Press <ENTER> to show the FW Release date.
TX INTF FIRMWARE
MM/DD/YY
Press CLEAR to exit the data menu.
ASI LINK SELECT
B-LINK (J3)
Note: This is for ASI mode only.
This display shows the A-LINK (J4) or B-LINK (J3). Upon entry, the current status of the
mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-39
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI LINK MODE
MANUAL
Note: This is for ASI mode only.
This display shows the ASI Link Mode selection of either Manual or Auto. Upon entry,
the current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
ASI LOOP BW
WIDE
Note: This is for ASI mode only.
This display shows the ASI Loop BW selection of either Wide or Narrow. Upon entry,
the current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
INTRFC LOOP THRU
OFF
Displays the Interface Loop thru selection of either ON or OFF. Upon entry, the current
status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
When ON is selected, input data is looped to the output of the terrestrial interface and
data continues into the modulator. This mode is indential to Interface Loopback specified
under the Configuration Interface menu; however, the yellow TEST MODE LED is not
illuminated. Conceptually, the data output is operating as a monitor point.
5-40
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
LVDS STATUS (J7)
RX LVDS
Note: Jumper setting dependent.
This display shows the status of either RX LVDS or TX LVDS. Upon entry, the current
status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
RTS TX-IF CNTRL
OFF
This display shows whether the RTS TX-IF Control is ON or OFF. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
RTS STATE
NORMAL
This display shows the RTS selection of either NORMAL or INVERT. Upon entry, the
current status of the mode type is displayed.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
5-41
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8.8
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:SYSTEM
TIME: 12:00:00AM
DATE: 7/04/76
The current time and date in the modulator memory are displayed. To set the modulator
time and/or date, proceed as follows:
1
Press <ENTER>
2
Press [←] or [→] to position the flashing cursor over the parameter to be changed
3
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the parameter to the desired value
4
Once the parameters are displayed as desired, press <ENTER> to set the time and date
REMOTE BAUD RATE
9600 BPS
EVEN
The current baud rate and parity selection of the modulator are displayed. To set the
modulator baud rate and/or parity, proceed as follows:
1
Press <ENTER>.
2
Press [←] or [→] to position the flashing cursor over the parameter to be changed.
3
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the parameter to the desired value.
4
Once the parameters are displayed as desired, press <ENTER> to set the baud rate and
parity. The baud rate can be set from 300 to 19200. The parity can be set to EVEN, ODD, or
NONE.
REMOTE ADDRESS
1
The current modulator address is displayed (1 to 255). To set the remote address, proceed
as follows:
1
Press <ENTER>.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to change the parameter to the desired value.
3
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
Note: Address 0 is reserved as a global address.
5-42
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
REMOTE TYPE
RS-485 (4-WIRE)
Use this display to select a remote interface type.
Choices include:
RS-485 (4-wire)
RS-485 (2-wire)
RS-232
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
YEAR DISPLAY
2 – DIGIT
Use this menu to set the year display to 2 or 4 digits.
1
Press [↑] or [↓] to select an item.
2
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
TEST MODE STATUS
– +– – – – –
The following modulator test points are listed in this Test Mode Status window, and will
display a “+” when a test mode is active:
•
RF OUTPUT
•
CARRIER MODE
•
MOD FAULTS
•
INTF FAULTS
•
2047 PATTERN
•
IMPULSE TEST
•
INTERFACE LOOPBACK
To view the test modes,
1
Press <ENTER>.
2
Press [←] or [→] to move through the list of test modes.
5-43
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
LAMP TEST ??
PRESS ENTER
Use the Lamp Test function to verify the front panel indicators.
Press <ENTER> to turn on all of the front panel indicators for 3 seconds.
DISPLAY CONTRAST
LEVEL:
64
Set the contrast level of the front panel display. Level 64 is the default.
1
Press <ENTER> to change the contrast of the front panel display.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the number at the flashing cursor from 0 to 100.
3
Press <ENTER> to execute the change.
M&C FIRMWARE
FW/NNNN-DRR
This status-only window displays the M&C module firmware version. Press <ENTER>
to display the release date of this firmware.
M&C FIRMWARE
MM/DD/YYYY
Press <CLEAR> to exit the date window.
BOOT FIRMWARE
FW/NNNN-DRR
This status-only window displays the BOOT Firmware number. Press <ENTER> to
display the release date of this firmware. Press <ENTER> again to display the firmware
version.
5-44
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
BOOT FIRMWARE
VER: X.X.X
Press <CLEAR> to exit the date window.
ENCODER FIRMWARE
FW/NNNN-DRR
This status-only window displays the ENCODER FIRMWARE number. Press
<ENTER> to display the release date of this firmware. Press <ENTER> again to display
the firmware version.
ENCODER FIRMWARE
MM/DD/YYYY
Press <CLEAR> to exit the date window.
R/S FIRMWARE
FW/NNNN-DRR
This status only window displays the R/S FIRMWARE number. Press <ENTER> to
display the release date of this firmware. Press <ENTER> again to display the firmware
version.
R/S FIRMWARE
MM/DD/YYYY
Press <CLEAR> to exit the date window.
5-45
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.8.8.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Master Reset Function
MASTER RESET
HARD/SOFT
CAUTION
5.6.8.8.2
When a hard reset is initiated, the modulator hardware is reset, and all
default configuration settings will be installed. When a soft reset is
initialized, the modulator hardware will be reset, but the initial firmware
configuration settings will be saved.
1
Press <ENTER> once to access SOFT.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to alternate between HARD and SOFT until the desired type is visible.
3
Press <ENTER>. If SOFT has been selected,
4
Press <ENTER> again to reset the modulator. If HARD is selected, press [→] until the cursor
is on YES.
5
Press <ENTER>.
Alarm Relay Function
ALARM RELAY
NORMAL
This window displays the Alarm Relay selections of NORMAL or INVERT.
5-46
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.6.9
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FUNCTION SELECT:UTILITY:MOD OPTIONS
REV EMULATION
CURRENT VERSION
Use this menu to select the emulation mode of a previous functional revision. Revision
emulation allows the user interfaces (either front panel or remote) to emulate a previous
version of software. Upon entry, the current version is displayed.
1
Press a arrow key to select the FUNCTIONAL versions.
2
Press [ENTER] to execute the change.
Note: The Utility menu numbers increase with each software version change.
MOD OPTIONS
-++
This menu displays the modulator options listed below. If an option is not installed, the ““ (minus) symbol is displayed to the right of the option. If the option is installed, the “+“
(plus) symbol is displayed to the right of the option.
•
•
•
OEM LCD
16QAM
8PSK
(- or +)
(- or +)
(- or +)
- = Not Installed
+ = Installed
MODEM SERIAL #
012345678
This is a status-only display of the modulator serial number.
CONFIGURATION
CODE – MOD
Use this window to execute the Comtech EF Data-supplied “FAST” code. On entry, the
current configuration code is displayed with the flashing cursor on the first character.
5-47
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
1
Press [←] or [→] to move the flashing cursor.
2
Press [↑] or [↓] to increase or decrease the digit at the flashing cursor.
3
Press <ENTER> to execute the change. Entering this code enables the corresponding
modulator option.
To purchase an option, contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support for more
information.
IMPORTANT
5.6.10
UTILITY:FACTORY SET-UP
UTILITY
FACTORY SET-UP
CAUTION
This configuration is used for factory alignment and filter setup
parameters. To avoid modulator failure, Factory Setup should not be
changed by unauthorized persons.
5-48
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
5.7
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
INITIAL DEFAULT SETTINGS
Parameter
Modulation/Code Rate
Data Rate
Symbol Rate
IF Frequency
TX Clock Phase
TX Data Phase
2047 Pattern
TX SYNC Select
TX Data Fault
MOD Power Offset
MOD Spectrum
RS422 Interface Select
Interface Mode Select
RTS TX-IF CNTRL
Interface Mode Select
Inter face Select
TX Interface Firmware
ASI Link Select
ASI Loop BW
Interface Loop Thru
DTE Status
DTE TX-IF Control
Interface Loop Thru
RTS TX-IF Control
INTF LOOP THRU
Interface Select
ASI Link Select
Asi Loop BW
Interface Loop Thru
Setting
Parameter
Configuration Modulator
QPSK 1/2
IF Output
15.000,000 Mbps TX Power Level
15.000000 Msps
Scrambler
70 MHz
Carrier Mode
Configuration Interface
Normal
TX CLK Activity
Normal
DVB Framing Type
Off
INTF Loopback
EXT SYNC
TX Coding Format
None
Utility Modulator
+0.0 dB
Power UP TX-IF
Normal
Modulator Type
Utility Interface
RS422 Interface
DVB (J3)
RTS State
Serial
CTS State
Off
DM State
LVDS Interface
Serial
ASI/RS422 Interface
ASI
RTS TX-IF Control
FW/6220A
RTS State
B-Link (J3)
CTS State
Wide
DM State
Off
ST State
ECL/HSSI Interface
Available
DTE State
Off
DCE State
G.703 Interface
Off
RTS State
Off
TX Interface FW
SMPTE 310M
Off
RTS State
ASI/LVDS
ASI
LVDS Status
B-Link (J3)
RTS TX-IF CNTRL
Wide
RTS State
Off
5-49
Setting
Off
-10.0 dBm
On
Normal-Modulated
Alarm
188
Off
AMI
Last Known
DVB-1
Normal
Normal
Normal
Off
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal
FW/6231
Normal
RX LVDS (J7)
Off
Normal
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Time and Date
Remote Baud Rate
Remote Address
5.8
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Utility System
12:00:00AM, 7/04/76 Remote Type
9600 bit/s
Year Display
1
Display Contrast
RS485 (4-Wire)
2-Digit
64
REVISION EMULATION OPERATION
Use the revision emulation feature in the Utlity Modem Type menu to program an emulation
mode from Version 1.1.1 through the current version.
Table 5-2. SDM-2020 Modulator Revision Emulation
Software #
Firmware #
Firmware #
1.1.1
FW/5613-1-
Original Release
1.1.2
FW5613-1A
Added data to RS422 interface mode selection
menu.
2.1.1
FW/5613-1B
Added LVDS interface data to Utility menu.
2.1.2
FW/5613-1C
User interface changes.
3.1.1
FW/5613-1D
User interface changes
4.1.1
FW/5613-1E
Added ASI/RS422 interface data to Utility menu.
4.1.2
FW/5613-1F
Added ASI interface changes.
4.1.3
FW/5613-1G
Incorporated RS FIFO changes
4.1.4
FW/5613-1H
Added alarm relay.
4.1.5
FW/5613-1J
Correct spur problems.
5.1.1
FW/5613-1K
Added ECL/HSSI interface data to Utitlity menu.
5.2.1
FW/5613-1L
Added data clock spectrum lock detect fault.
5.2.2
FW/5613-1M
Added OEM display for “ET_” command.
5.2.3
FW/5613-1N
Added DCE signal on ECL interface.
5.3.1
FW/5613-1P
Added G.703 interface data to Utility menu.
5.3.2
FW/5612-1R
Added SMPTE 310M interface data to Utility
menu.
6.1.1
FW/5613-1T
User interface changes.
6.1.2
FW/5613-1U
FW/5613-2U
Introduced FW/5613-2.
7.1.1
FW/5613-1V
FW/5613-2V
Added 16QAM rate as a FAST option.
7.1.2
FW/5613-1W
FW/5613-2W
User interface changes.
8.1.1
FW/5613-1Y
FW/5613-2Y
User interface changes. Added data rates for
G.703 T1 and E1.
5-50
Description of Change
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 5-2. SDM-2020 Modulator Revision Emulation (Continued)
Software #
Firmware #
Firmware #
8.1.4
FW/5613-1AC
FW/5613-2AC
Added ASI/LVDS interface data to Utility menu.
8.1.5
FW/5613-1AD
FW/5613-2AD
User interface changes.
9.1.2
FW/5613-1AG
FW/5613-2AG
User interface changes.
5-51
Description of Change
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Front Panel Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
5-52
Chapter 6. DATA INTERFACES
6.1
DESCRIPTION
The data interface is a plug-in module that provides a specific terrestrial connection to the
modulator unit. Where practical, both the TX (modulator) and RX (demodulator) paths
are incorporated into the data interface.
Different interfaces are described in the following chapters. As additional interfaces are
developed, a new chapter will be added to include the new interfaces. Contact Comtech
EF Data Customer Support for the latest offering.
6.1.1
INTERFACE/M&C SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
As additional data interfaces are introduced, the software is revised to support the
operation of each interface. Table 6-1 summarizes the minimum software version
necessary to operate each interface type.
Table 6-1. Minimum Software Revisions
Data Interface
Minimum Software Version
RS-422
1.1.1
LVDS
1.1.1
1
4.1.1
ECL/HSSI
5.1.1
G.703
5.3.1
G.703 (Adds T1and E1)
8.1.1
SMPTE 310M
5.3.2
ASI/LVDS
8.1.4
ASI & RS-422
To avoid damaging the modulator, always disconnect the power before removing
or installing a data interface.
CAUTION
1
ASI & RS-422 interface is being phase out for the ASI/LVDS interface. Contact Comtech EF Data Customer
Support department if this action causes a configuration problem.
6-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
6-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
6.1.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA
The data format for the transmit (TX) and receive (RX) data interfaces are the same.
There are three general modes of operation that are described in Section 3.1:
•
None (187)
•
188
•
204
When None (187) mode is selected, no frame structure is expected, while the 188 and
204 modes synchronize to standard MPEG-2 transport frames. Other supported data
formats are referenced in the appropriate section of this appendix, but the data from other
frame formats is extracted and converted to one of the three modes of operation.
Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 depict the 204-byte packetization for byte parallel and byte
serial formats, showing all possible data fields and timing signal relationships. The 188
byte and no framing formats are subsets of the 204 byte format.
1 Byte Sync
DATA
187 Bytes Payload
187
1
SYNC
1 Byte Sync
16 RS Bytes
1
16
1
SYNC
SYNC
CLOCK
DVALID
Figure 6-1. 204 Byte Parallel Format
8 Bits Sync
DATA
0
1
0
0
0
1
1496 Bits Payload
1
128 Bits RS
1
8 Bits Sync
0
SYNC
CLOCK
DVALID
Figure 6-2. 204 Byte Serial Format
6-3
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Note:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
For proper operation, data and timing must be continuous, and meet the described criteria as
specified in Figure 6-1, Figure 6-2, and Table 6-2.
Table 6-2. 204 Data and Timing
DATA
Payload data is byte parallel, where DATA 7 is the most significant bit; or byte serial,
where data is applied to DATA 7 with the most significant bit preceding the least.
For 188 and 204 format, the payload is 187 bytes in length, preceded by a sync word. In
the 204-byte mode, the payload is followed by 16 bytes of reed-Solomon data, or 16 filler
bytes.
CLOCK
The clock is at the bit or byte rate in accordance with serial or parallel mode. The rising
edge of the clock is centered on the data.
SYNC
SYNC timing depends upon the selection made for DVB FRAMING TYPE in the
Configuration Interface menu
DVB Framing Type
SYNC
188 or 204
The SYNC timing is derived from either the EXT SYNC or
CORR ON DATA selection from the Configuration Interface
menu. See the TX SYNC SELECT command, Appendix A.
None
The SYNC signal is ignored.
For the 188 or 204 byte framing modes, either a SYNC pulse or SYNC byte of value 47h
is required, dependent on the modulator configuration. Both may be applied, with only
one having effect, dependent upon configuration. When used, the SYNC pulse is active
high centered over the SYNC word. In parallel operation, it is one byte clock width. In
serial operation, the modulator recognizes the SYNC pulse centered on the entire SYNC
bit (8 clocks wide), or centered on the most significant bit of the byte (1 clock wide).
DVALID
Although this signal is identified by both DVB and DBS formats, it is not used by the
modulator.
6-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
6-5
Chapter 7. RS-422 PARALLEL/SERIAL
INTERFACE
7.1
GENERAL
This interface operates at RS-422 signal levels. It accommodates a variety of MPEG-2
framing formats and EIA-530 serial data.
7.1.1
7.1.2
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
TM1449
Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and Similar Professional Equipment
TIA/EIA-644
Telecommunications Industry Standard, Electrical Characteristics Of Low
Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) Interface Circuits (originally Standards
Proposal SP-3357)
RS-422
Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits
EIA-530
High Speed 25-Position Interface for Data Circuit - Terminating Equipment
DESCRIPTION
The RS-422 interface has two data connectors and an auxiliary connector supporting
various operating modes.
•
•
J3 Parallel/Serial DVB Connector (25-pin D, female):
•
Parallel mode – In this mode, the interface behaves like a DVB parallel
synchronous interface, but with RS-422 levels. The input is at the byte
rate.
•
Serial mode – An alternate form of operation is possible, where the MSB
is used for serial input at the bit rate.
J4 Serial EIA-530 Connector (25-pin D, female):
•
Serial mode only – RS-422 levels with pinout and operation per EIA-530
at a serial clock rate.
7-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
RS-422 Data Interface
•
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
J5 Auxiliary Connector (9-pin D, female):
•
Provides an additional ST Clock (output), plus open collector fault
signals.
The appropriate interface control is automatically enabled when the interface module is
installed in the modulator. The plug-in data interface is programmable for serial or
parallel operation from either the front panel keypad or the remote port on the rear panel.
The following cables, or an equivalent computer grade cable incorporating twisted,
shielded pairs, are recommended:
•
Belden type LV Computer M9768
•
Belden 8175
The Belden 8175 has a lower capacitance, however it has a larger diameter and requires
the selection of an appropriate connector shell.
The typical cable length for the serial/parallel interfaces is ≤ 5 meters (16.405 feet).
The interface operates to the specifications described in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1. RS-422 Interface Specifications
General Specifications
Interface Type
RS-422/EIA-530 Synchronous, Serial/Parallel.
Data Rate
1.5 to 18 Mbit/s, serial.
1.5 to 100 Mbit/s, parallel
Data Framing
Formats
188, 204 byte packets per ETS 300 421, and None.
Connectors
25-pin, female D for serial data.
25-pin, female D for parallel data.
9-pin, female D for reference clock from unit (modulator only), plus fault.
Electrical Properties
Per RS-422.
Parallel Signal
Types
TX: TX Clock, TX Data, Data Valid, and Sync per TM1449.
The modulator does not require Sync or Data Valid with the 188 or 204
byte patterns.
Parallel: RX Clock, RX Data, Data Valid, and Sync per TM1449
Reference (ST equivalent).
Serial Signal Types
Serial: SD, ST, TT, RS, CS, RD, RT, RR (CD).
Voltage Level
4 ± 2V differential into 100Ω.
7-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
RS-422 Data Interface
CONFIGURATION
Note: The jumper location on the interface card and the optional positions are shown in
Figure 7-1.
A single jumper provides the option for a transmit or receive reference clock on
connector J3 (pins 2 and 15). The pins are configured at the factory as signal ground per
TM 1449. For Demodulator applications, where an SCT output is required in conjunction
with using the DVB Data port (J3). SCT may be jumped to pins 2 and 15, thus providing
all signals on a single connector.
J4 EIA-530
SERIAL
J5 AUX
The same jumper configuration in the demodulator applications provides for a Master
clock input. Alternatively, SCT and Master clock interconnects are available on the
Auxiliary port (J5).
J3 DVB
PARALLEL/SERIAL
7.1.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
NOTE:
JUMPER SELECTS FOR
PINS 2 & 15 OF THE J3
DVB PARALLEL/SERIAL
REAR PANEL CONNECTOR
DVB
CONFIGURATION
(FACTORY SETTING)
J 3 - 2 & 15
GND
OPTIONAL M2P CLOCK
CONFIGURATION FOR
MODULATOR ONLY
J3 - 2 & 1 5
Figure 7-1. RS-422 Interface Module PCB
7-3
SCT CLOCK
OUTPUT
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
RS-422 Data Interface
7.1.4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
USER INTERFACES
The following paragraphs describe the RS-422 user interfaces.
7.1.4.1
PARALLEL, J3, DB25 FEMALE (DVB PARALLEL/SERIAL DATA
INTERFACE)
This data port supports DVB and DBS parallel and serial packetized data. There are three
standard frame formats supported, as follows:
•
None, no framing byte format: Continuous serial or parallel payload data with no
framing information.
•
188 byte format:
•
Serial or parallel data, (1 sync byte + 187 payload bytes).
•
204 byte format:
•
Serial or parallel data, (1 sync byte + 187 payload bytes + 16 bytes for
Reed-Solomon coding).
Figure 7-1 and Figure 7-2 depict the 204-byte packetization for byte parallel and byte
serial formats, showing all possible data fields and timing signal relationships.
The 188 byte and no framing formats are subsets of the 204 byte format.
7.1.4.1.1
Connector Pinout, J3, Parallel/Serial DVB
The connector is a sub-miniature, 25-pin, female D connector, with threaded jack nuts
(refer to Table 7-2 for pinout). All signals on this connector are inputs to the modulator,
except the signal pair on pins 2 and 15 when the jumper is selected for SCT output.
When used as a serial data port, Data 7 (pins 3 and 16) are the active data pins. Signal
assignments for pins 2 and 15 are jumper-selectable. They are defined as signal ground in
the DVB definition of TM1449, but may be configured to provide SCT out.
Signal levels are as defined in RS-422. Per TM1449, the differential sense of all signal
pairs is a logic “1” when “A” is positive with respect to “B.” This is the normal selection
in the Configuration Interface menu.
The same jumper provides the option for a TX or RX reference clock on connector J3
(pins 2 and 15). The pins are configured at the factory as signal ground per TM 1449. For
modulator applications where an SCT output is required in conjunction with using the
DVB Data port (J3), SCT may be jumped to pins 2 and 15, thus providing all signals on a
single connector.
7-4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
R
A
P
3
J
A
E
L
S
4
J
E
L
IA
R
U
A
5
J
X
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
RS-422 Data Interface
O
C
A
(F
F
M
JU
R
O
IE
P
J3
-4
S
R
C
L
E
&
2
N
T
5
1
J3
C
V
D
IG
F
N
R
O
T
C
L
C
1
&
2
A
R
T
E
S
Y
B
U
N
)O
G
IT
K
C
O
5
D
N
G
IO
F
N
A
R
U
G
D
O
M
U
O
T
A
L
N
O
I
T
R
J3
5
1
&
2
O
M
E
D
T
C
S
A
L
U
D
K
C
O
L
T
R
T
U
O
-2
J3
5
1
&
M
E
T
S
A
L
C
R
I
K
C
O
Table 7-2. DVB Interface Connector Pinout (J3)
Pin #
Signal Function/Name
1
Clock A
2
System GND/REFCLKB
Type
Comment
I/O
Mod/Demod
O/GND
Mod/Demod
Jumper selectable
SCT for Modulator
Master Clock for Demodulator
3
Data 7 A (MSB/Serial)
I/O
Mod/Demod
4
Data 6 A
I/O
Mod/Demod
5
Data 5 A
I/O
Mod/Demod
6
Data 4 A
I/O
Mod/Demod
7
Data 3 A
I/O
Mod/Demod
8
Data 2 A
I/O
Mod/Demod
9
Data 1 A
I/O
Mod/Demod
10
Data 0 A
I/O
Mod/Demod
11
DVALID A
I/O
Mod/Demod
12
SYNC A
I/O
Mod/Demod
13
Cable Shield
I/O
Mod/Demod
14
Clock B
I/O
Mod/Demod
15
System GND/REFCLKA
O/GND
Mod/Demod
Jumper selectable
SCT for Modulator
Master Clock for Demodulator
16
Data 7 B (MSB/Serial)
I/O
Mod/Demod
17
Data 6 B
I/O
Mod/Demod
18
Data 5 B
I/O
Mod/Demod
19
Data 4 B
I/O
Mod/Demod
20
Data 3 B
I/O
Mod/Demod
21
Data 2 B
I/O
Mod/Demod
22
Data 1 B
I/O
Mod/Demod
23
Data 0 B
I/O
Mod/Demod
24
DVALID B
I/O
Mod/Demod
25
SYNC B
I/O
Mod/Demod
7-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
RS-422 Data Interface
7.1.4.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
SERIAL, J4, DB25 FEMALE (EIA-530 SERIAL DATA INTERFACE)
This interface has no provision for SYNC or DVALID signals. If framing is desired, a
sync byte (47 hex) is imbedded into the data stream every 188 or 204 bytes, as selected in
the modulator configuration. The modulator detects the sync byte and formats the serial
interface data into a standard, error-protected 204-byte packet.
7.1.4.2.1
Connector Pinouts, J4, EIA-530
The connector is a subminiature, 25-pin, female D connector, with threaded jack nuts.
Signal functions are as defined in EIA-530.
The differential sense of all signals is logic “1” when “B” is positive with respect to “A”
as defined in EIA-530. Only those pins indicated as “modulator” in the table are
applicable.
Table 7-3. EIA-530 Serial Interface Connector Pinout (J4)
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Signal Function
530 Shield
Transmit Data (TD-A)
Receive Data (RD-A)
Request To Send (EIA-A)
Clear To Send (CS-A)
DCE Ready (DM-A)
Signal Ground
Receive Line Signal Detect (RR-A)
Receive Timing (RT-B)
Receive Line Signal Detect (RR-B)
Terminal Timing (TT-B)
Send Timing (ST-B)
Clear To Send (CS-B)
Transmit Data (TD-B)
Send Timing (ST-A)
Receive Data (RD-B)
Receive Timing (RT-A)
Name
Shield
BA-A
BB-A
CA-A
CB-A
CC-A
AB
CF-A
DD-B
CF-B
DA-B
DB-B
CB-B
BA-B
DB-A
BB-B
DD-A
Request To Send (EIA-B)
Master Clock (MC-A)
Demodulator Fault (DF)
DCE Ready (DM-B)
Master Clock (MC-B)
Terminal Timing (TT-A)
Modulator Fault (MF)
CA-B
N/A
N/A
CC-B
N/A
DA-A
N/A
7-6
Type
I
O
I
O
O
GND
O
O
O
I
O
O
I
O
O
O
N/C
I
I
O
O
I
I
O
Comment
Mod/Demod
Modulator
Demodulator
Modulator
Modulator
Demodulator
Demodulator
Demodulator
Demodulator
Modulator
Modulator
Modulator
Modulator
Modulator
Demodulator
Demodulator
Modulator
Demodulator
Demodulator
Demodulator
Demodulator
Modulator
Modulator
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
RS-422 Data Interface
7.1.4.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
AUXILIARY, J5
This port provides for other modem-specific signals not otherwise defined for either or
both of the two data connectors.
7.1.4.3.1
Connector Pinout, J5
The connector is a sub-miniature, 9-pin, female D connector, with threaded jack nuts
(refer to Table 7-4 for connector pinout). Differential pairs are RS-422 compatible.
Note: The sense of differential signal pairs is a logic “1” when “B” is positive with
respect to “A”.
Single-ended signals (MF and DF fault signals) are open collector where:
Voh=12V max. and Vol=0.5V max. @ Iol=8 ma.
A pull-up resistor external to the equipment is required.
The fault signals, MF and DF, operate as follows: A fault is indicated by an “OFF”
collector (high) and OK status is indicated by an “ON” collector (low).
Table 7-4. Auxiliary Connector Pinout (J5)
Pin #
Signal Function
Name
1
2
3
Type
GND
Demod Fault
Indicator
DF
Send Timing
ST-A
I
Comment
Signal Ground
Demodulator Summary Fault
Redundancy switch application
O
Modulator
SCT for terrestrial
synchronization
4
N/C
5
Master Clock
MC-B
I
Demodulator
6
Mod Fault Indicator
MF
O
Modulator Summary Fault
Redundancy switch application
7
Carrier Detect
/CD
O
Demodulator
8
Send Timing
ST-B
O
Modulator
SCT for terrestrial
synchronization
9
Master Clock
MC-A
I
7-7
Demodulator
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
RS-422 Data Interface
7.1.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
RS-422 INTERFACE FRONT PANEL MENUS
Refer to Chapter 5, Utility Interface Menu. If the RS-422 interface module is installed,
the Utility Interface menu displays commands specific to that interface.
7.1.6
RS-422 INTERFACE REMOTE CONTROL COMMANDS
Refer to Appendix A.
7-8
Chapter 8. LOW VOLTAGE
DIFFERENTIAL SIGNAL (LVDS)
8.1
GENERAL
The following paragraphs describe the LVDS interface. This plug-in module provides the
physical and electrical interface between an SDM-2020 modulator or demodulator and
DVB or DBS signal sources operating with LVDS electrical characteristics.
8.1.1
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
TM1449
Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and Similar Profession
TIA/EIA-644 Telecommunications Industry Standard, Electrical Characteris
Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS) Interface Circuits (origin
Proposal SP-3357)
8.1.2
DESCRIPTION
The LVDS interface has dedicated transmit and receive connectors and an auxiliary
connector. The Receive Out connector is used with the demodulator while the Transmit
In connector is used with the modulator:
•
J3 Receive Out connector (25-pin D, female). This connector supports the
following data formats:
Parallel format: The interface is a DVB 8-bit parallel synchronous
interface. Data and clock exit the connector and the output clock (Clock
A and Clock B) is at the byte rate.
Serial format: MSB (Data7) is used for serial output data and the output
clock (Clock A and Clock B) is at the bit rate.
8-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS)
•
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
J4 Transmit In connector (25-pin D, female):
Parallel format: The interface is a DVB 8-bit parallel synchronous
interface. Data and clock are input to the connector and the input clock
(Clock A and Clock B) is at the byte rate.
Serial format: MSB (Data7) is used for serial input data and the input
clock (Clock A and Clock B) is at the bit rate.
•
J5 Auxiliary connector (9-pin D, female):
Provides TX and RX clock references and open collector fault signals.
The TX In or RX Out interface is automatically enabled when the interface module is
installed in the modulator or demodulator. The plug-in data interface is programmable for
serial or parallel operation from either the front panel keypad or the remote port on the
rear panel.
The following cables, or an equivalent computer grade cable incorporating twisted,
shielded pairs, are recommended:
•
Belden type LV Computer M9768
•
Belden 8175
The Belden 8175 has a lower capacitance, however it has a larger diameter and requires
the selection of an appropriate connector shell.
The typical cable length for the serial/parallel interfaces is ≤ 5 meters (16.405 feet). The
interface operates to the specifications described in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1. LVDS Specifications
General Specifications
Interface Type
LVDS/DVB Synchronous, Serial/Parallel.
Data Rate
1.5 to 32 Mbit/s, serial.
1.5 to 100 Mbit/s, parallel.
Data Framing Formats
188, 204 byte packets per ETS 300 421, and None.
Connectors
25-pin D female for TX data.
25-pin D female for RX data.
9-pin D female for reference clocks plus faults.
Electrical Properties
Per TIA/EIA-644.
8-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS)
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 8-1. LVDS Specifications (Continued)
General Specifications
Signal Types
TX: TX Clock, TX Data, Data Valid, and Sync per TM1449.
The modulator does not require Sync or Data Valid with the 188 or 204 b
Voltage Levels
CONFIGURATION
The interface provides DVB compliant operation when pins 2 and 15 are grounded using
the “DVB Configuration” jumper settings as described in the following paragraphs. A
reference clock from the modulator is output from the connector (J4) when the jumpers
are selected for SCT Output operation. See jumpers J1 and J6.
Note: SCT clock is always available on the Auxiliary Connector J5 and requires no
jumper settings.
In a demodulator, the LVDS interface (J3) only has provision for DVB Configuration,
and the Master Clock Input is not used. See jumpers J2 and J7.
J4 - 2 & 15
DVB
CONFIGURATION
(FACTORY SETTING)
J1
SCT CLOCK OUTPUT
CLOCK
CONFIGURATION
J1
J6
3
3
J6
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
J4 TRANSMIT IN
J5 AUX
MODULATOR
J1 J6
J2 J7
J3 RECEIVE OUT
8.1.3
290 ± 40 mV differential into 100Ω.
DEMODULATOR
DVB
CONFIGURATION
(FACTORY SETTING)
J2
J7
3
3
2
2
1
1
Figure 8-1. LVDS Interface Module PCB
8-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS)
8.1.4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
RECEIVE/TRANSMIT DATA, J3/J4, DB25 FEMALE
The receive transmit data interfaces have the same formats. There are three general
modes of operation controlled via the front panel display/keypad or the remote port. The
standard frame formats supported are as follows:
•
188 Mode: The unit seeks a DVB/MPEG2 frame consisting of 1 sync byte
(047 hex) and 187 bytes of data. The frame structure is acquired, and 16 bytes of
Reed-Solomon check bytes are added by the modulator to create a satellite frame
of 204 bytes. The 16 bytes are removed by the demodulator and the 188-byte
frame returned to the terrestrial circuit.
•
204 Mode: A 204-byte frame structure consisting of 1 sync byte (047 hex) plus
187 bytes of data and 16 bytes reserved for check bytes is expected. The
modulator acquires the frame structure and fills the Reed-Solomon bytes into the
16 reserved bytes, again resulting in a 204-byte satellite frame. The demodulator
returns the 204-byte frame to the terrestrial circuit.
•
None: In this mode, no incoming frame structure is expected, and the modulator
creates one. A sync byte (047 hex) is created, followed by 187 bytes of data plus
16 Reed-Solomon check bytes. The resulting satellite frame is 204 bytes. The
demodulator removes the 16 Reed-Solomon bytes and the sync byte and returns
the data to the terrestrial circuit.
Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2 depict the 204-byte packetization for byte parallel and byte
serial formats at J3 and J4, showing all possible data fields and timing signal
relationships.
The 188-byte and no framing formats are subsets of the 204-byte format.
8.1.4.1
CONNECTOR PINOUTS J3
The connector is a 25-pin sub-miniature D female, with threaded jack nuts. All signals for
this connector are outputs to the demodulator, except the signal pair on pins 2 and 15 (for
an exception; see jumper settings). When used as a serial data port, Data 7 (pins 3 and 16)
are the active data pins. For DVB parallel operation Data 7 through Data 8 are used.
Signal levels are as defined in TIA/EIA-644. Per TM1449, the differential sense of all
signal pairs is a logic “1” when “A” is positive with respect to “B”. This is the normal
selection in the Configuration Interface menu. For DBS applications, the polarity of
signals may be inverted from the Configuration Interface menu.
8-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS)
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 8-2. DVB Interface Connector Pinout, J3 RX Out (Demodulator Only)
Pin #
Signal Function/Name
1
Clock A
2
System GND/REFCLKB
Type
Comment
O
Demod
I/GND
Demod,
LVDS Interface - N/A, jumper on GND only
3
Data 7 A(MSB/Serial)
O
Demod
4
Data 6 A
O
Demod
5
Data 5 A
O
Demod
6
Data 4 A
O
Demod
7
Data 3 A
O
Demod
8
Data 2 A
O
Demod
9
Data 1 A
O
Demod
10
Data 0 A
O
Demod
11
DVALID A
O
Demod
12
SYNC A
O
Demod
13
Cable Shield
O
Demod
14
Clock B
O
Demod
15
System GND/REFCLKA
I/GND
Demod,
LVDS Interface - N/A, jumper on GND only
16
Data 7 B (MSB/Serial)
O
Demod
17
Data 6 B
O
Demod
18
Data 5 B
O
Demod
19
Data 4 B
O
Demod
20
Data 3 B
O
Demod
21
Data 2 B
O
Demod
22
Data 1 B
O
Demod
23
Data 0 B
O
Demod
24
DVALID B
O
Demod
25
SYNC B
O
Demod
8-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS)
8.1.4.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONNECTOR PINOUTS J4
The connector is a 25-pin sub-miniature D female, with threaded jack nuts for connector
pinout). All signals for this connector are inputs to the modulator, except the signal pair
on pins 2 and 15 (for an exception; see jumper settings). When used as a serial data port,
Data 7 (pins 3 and 16) are the active data pins. For DVB parallel operation Data 7
through Data 8 are used.
Signal levels are as defined in TIA/EIA-644. Per TM1449, the differential sense of all
signal pairs is a logic “1” when “A” is positive with respect to “B”. This is the normal
selection in the Configuration Interface menu. For DBS applications, the polarity of
signals may be inverted from the Configuration Interface menu.
Table 8-3. DVB Interface Connector Pinout, J4 TX IN
Pin #
1
2
Signal Function/Name
Clock A
System GND/REFCLKB
Type
I
O/GND
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Data 7 A (MSB/Serial)
Data 6 A
Data 5 A
Data 4 A
Data 3 A
Data 2 A
Data 1 A
Data 0 A
DVALID A
SYNC A
Cable Shield
Clock B
System GND/REFCLKA
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
O/GND
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Data 7 B (MSB/Serial)
Data 6 B
Data 5 B
Data 4 B
Data 3 B
Data 2 B
Data 1 B
Data 0 B
DVALID B
SYNC B
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Comment
Mod
Mod,
Jumper selectable
SCT output for Modulator
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod, Modulator Ignores
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod/Demod
Jumper selectable
SCT output for Modulator
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
Mod
8-6
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS)
8.1.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
AUXILIARY, J5
This port provides for other modem-specific signals not otherwise defined on the
data connectors.
8.1.5.1
CONNECTOR PINOUT J5
The connector is a sub-miniature, 9-pin D female, with threaded jack nuts. Differential
pairs are LVDS compatible.
Note: The sense of differential signal pairs is a logic “1” when “B” is positive with
respect to “A.”
Single-ended signals are open collector where:
Voh=12V max. and Vol=0.5V max. @ Iol=8 ma.
A pull-up resistor external to the equipment is required. The fault signals, MF and DF,
operate as follows: A fault is indicated by an “OFF” collector (high) and OK status is
indicated by an “ON” collector (low).
Table 8-3. Auxiliary Connector Pinout
Pin #
1
2
Signal Function
Name
Demod Fault Indicator
DF
Type
GND
O
3
Send Timing
ST-A
O
4
5
6
Master Clock
Mod Fault Indicator
MC-B
MF
N/C
I
O
7
8
Carrier Detect
Send Timing
/CD
ST-B
O
O
9
Master Clock
MC-A
I
8.1.6
Comment
Signal Ground
Demodulator Summary Fault
Redundancy switch application
Modulator
SCT for terrestrial synchronization
Demodulator
Modulator Summary Fault
Redundancy switch application
Demodulator
Modulator
SCT for terrestrial synchronization
Demodulator
LVDS INTERFACE FRONT PANEL MENUS
Refer to Chapter 5, Utility Interface menu.
8.1.7
LVDS REMOTE INTERFACE COMMANDS
Refer to Appendix A.
8-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS)
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
8-8
Chapter 9. ASI/RS-422 DATA INTERFACE
9.1
ASI/RS-422 (ASYNCHRONOUS SERIAL INTERFACE AND
SERIAL DATA INTERFACE
The following paragraphs describe the ASI/RS-422 Data Interface.
9.1.1
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
Applicable specifications, as referenced herein, include:
9.1.2
TM1449
Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and Similar
Professional Equipment
RS-422
Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital
Interface Circuits
EIA-530
High Speed 25-Position Interface for Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
ETS 300 421
Digital Broadcasting Systems For Television, Sound
And Data Services; Framing Structure, Channels
Coding And Modulation For 11/12 GHz Services
DESCRIPTION
This data interface is a plug-in module that inserts into the rear of the SDM-2020
Modulator or SDM-2020 Demodulator chassis. It provides physical and electrical
connection between the external terrestrial circuit and the internal circuitry of the
modulator or demodulator. The plug-in interface has full duplex capability, but is
automatically configured for simplex-transmit or simplex-receive operation.
The ASI/RS-422 interface combines two electrical and physical interfaces into a single
assembly. The ASI section provides DVB-compliant interface with BNC connectors,
while the RS-422 section supports serial communications through a standard 25-pin D
connector per EIA-530. Operation for either ASI or RS-422 is selected by programming
the unit from the front panel keypad/LCD or from the remote port. Only one of the
interface types is active at a time.
9-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/RS-422 Data Interface
J3
TX
ASI
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
BNC-F
ASI
RECOVERY
J4
DC
POWER
J5
TT
SD
RECOVERY,
ST
RS
PROCESSING
EIA
CS
TERRESTRIAL
INTERFACE
RR
LOOPBACK
AND
LEVEL
TRANSLATORS
ASI/EIA
RD
RT
SELECTION
DM
M&C
J6
RX
ASI
J7
BNC-F
ASI
GENERATOR
ASI INPUTS EIA-422/530 ASI OUTPUTS
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
Figure 9-1. ASI/RS-422 Interface Block Diagram
Figure 9-2. ASI Module Assembly
9-2
MODULATOR/
DEMODULATOR
INTERFACE
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/RS-422 Data Interface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
A 75Ω coaxial cable (Belden 8281 or equivalent) is recommended for all ASI connectors.
Typical coaxial cable length is up to 140 meters (460 feet) with good quality coaxial
cable. Typical attenuation of up to 18 dB at 270 MHz is permitted. The following cables,
or an equivalent computer grade cable incorporating twisted, shielded pairs, are
recommended for the RS-422 interface:
•
Belden type LV Computer M9768
•
Belden 8175
The Belden 8175 has a lower capacitance, however it has a larger diameter and requires
the selection of an appropriate connector shell. The typical cable length for the
serial/parallel interfaces is ≤ 5 meters (16.405 feet).
The interface operates to the specifications described in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1. ASI/RS-422 Specifications
Data Framing Formats
Hot Pluggable
Data Rate
Clock Rate Uncertainty
Transport Clock ASI
Impedance
Return Loss
Loop Functions
(see Note 1)
Connectors
Electrical Properties
Packet Types
Signal Types
Voltage Level
ASI Data Loop 3 dB Cutoff
Frequency
Jitter Tolerance
Jitter Transfer
Cable Length, Typical
Data Rate
Clock Rate Uncertainty
Connectors
Electrical Properties
General Specifications
188, 204 byte packets per ETS 300 421, and None.
Not required. Unit power is turned off before removal or insertion of the
data interface.
ASI Specifications
1.5 to 100 Mbit/s ASI.
Programmed data rate ± 100 ppm.
The transport rate is 270 Mbit/s for all data rates.
75Ω.
15 dB, frequencies, 5 to 270 MHz.
Loopback
Loop Thru
BNC female, 75Ω.
Per TM 1449.
Burst or distributed.
Serial data.
800 mV ± 10% into 75Ω.
2 Hz
(see Note 2)
Meets ITU-T G.823 (3/93) and ITU-T G.824 (3/93)
≤ 0.5 dB peaking up to cutoff frequency.
–20 dB per decade beyond cutoff.
RG59
Belden 8281
Rev. –
50 m
70 m
Rev. A
100 m
140 m
RS-422 Specifications
1.5 to 18 Mbit/s, serial RS-422.
Programmed data rate ± 100 ppm.
25-pin D female per EIA-530.
Per RS-422.
9-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/RS-422 Data Interface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 9-1. ASI/RS-422 Specifications (Continued)
Signal
Types
RS-422 Specifications
SD, TT, ST, RD, RT, RS, RR, CS, DM, and MC.
Data synchronization is detected by correlating the data stream for the MPEG2 sync pattern
per ETS 300 421.
Voltage
Level
4 ± 2V differential into 100Ω.
Notes:
1.
Loopback – The yellow TEST MODE LED is illuminated when Loopback is turned
ON. During Loopback input data is looped back to the terrestrial data output
connector(s) and data continues into the modulator.
Loop Thru – Operation is nearly identical to Loopback, except the yellow LED is not
illuminated. Conceptually, the data output is operating as a monitor point.
2.
9.1.3
Rev. A or later assemblies include this capability. Rev dash (-) assemblies can be
upgraded to this capability.
TRANSMIT INPUT CONNECTORS, J3/J4, BNC, FEMALE
These two connectors accept TX data from the terrestrial interface. By default, J3 is
enabled and J4 is disabled. The active input is user programmable and maintained in nonvolatile memory of the modulator or demodulator chassis. Both connectors are terminated
into 75Ω whether selected or not selected.
9.1.4
RS-422 CONNECTOR, J5, 25-PIN D, FEMALE
This connector is compatible with EIA-530 operation and pinout. It is a serial interface
with RS-422 signals plus the TTL-OC fault signals indicating the status of the modulator
or demodulator.
9.1.4.1
CONNECTOR PINOUT J5
The connector is a 25-pin, female, D type, with threaded jack nuts.
Notes:
1.
RS-422 signal levels are as defined in RS-422.
2.
The differential sense of all signal pairs is a logic “1” when “A” is negative
with respect to “B.”
Single-ended signals (MF and DF fault signals) are open collector where:
9-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/RS-422 Data Interface
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Voh=12V max. and Vol=0.5V max. @ Iol=8 ma.
A pull-up resistor external to the equipment is required. The fault signals, MF and DF,
operate as follows: A fault is indicated by an “OFF” collector (high) and OK status is
indicated by an “ON” collector (low).
Table 9-2. RS-422 Connector Pinout (Per EIA-530), J5
Pin #
Signal Function
Name
Type
Comment
1
530 Shield
Shield
2
Transmit Data (TD-A)
BA-A
I
Modulator
3
Receive Data (RD-A)
BB-A
O
Demodulator
4
Request To Send (EIA-A)
CA-A
I
Modulator
5
Clear To Send (CS-A)
CB-A
O
Modulator
6
DCE Ready (DM-A)
CC-A
O
Demodulator
7
Signal Ground
AB
8
Receive Line Signal Detect (RR-A)
CF-A
O
Demodulator
9
Receive Timing (RT-B)
DD-B
O
Demodulator
10
Receive Line Signal Detect (RR-B)
CF-B
O
Demodulator
11
Terminal Timing (TT-B)
DA-B
I
Modulator
12
Send Timing (ST-B)
DB-B
O
Modulator
13
Clear To Send (CS-B)
CB-B
O
Modulator
14
Transmit Data (TD-B)
BA-B
I
Modulator
15
Send Timing (ST-A)
DB-A
O
Modulator
16
Receive Data (RD-B)
BB-B
O
Demodulator
17
Receive Timing (RT-A)
DD-A
O
Demodulator
18
Mod/Demod
GND
N/C
19
Request To Send (EIA-B)
CA-B
I
20
DTE Ready (MC-A)
CD-A
I
21
Demodulator Fault (DF)
DF
O
Demodulator
22
DCE Ready (DM-B)
CC-B
O
Demodulator
23
DTE Ready (MC-B)
CD-B
I
24
Terminal Timing (TT-A)
DA-A
I
Modulator
25
Modulator Fault (MF)
MF
O
Modulator
9-5
Modulator
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/RS-422 Data Interface
9.1.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
RECEIVE OUTPUT CONNECTORS, J6/J7, BNC, FEMALE
Duplicate signals exit both of these connectors on the demodulator to deliver receive data
to the terrestrial interface. J6 and J7 are both active at all times, no selection is required.
9.1.6
ASI/RS-422 INTERFACE FRONT PANEL MENUS
Refer to Chapter 5, Utility Interface menu.
9.1.7
ASI/RS-422 REMOTE INTERFACE COMMANDS
Refer to Appendix A.
9-6
Chapter 10. ECL/HSSI
DATA INTERFACE
10.1
GENERAL
The following paragraphs describe the ECL/HSSI interface. This plug-in module
provides the physical and electrical interface between an SDM-2020 Modulator or
Demodulator and a serial ECL signal source operating with TIA/EIA-612
electrical characteristics.
10.1.1
10.1.2
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
DBS-PS-007
DBS Development and Fabrication Project
ETS 300 421
Digital broadcasting systems for television, sound and data
services
TM1449
Interfaces for CATV / SMATV Headends and Similar
Professional Equipment, 10th Working Draft
TIA/EIA-612
Electrical Characteristics for an Interface at Data Signaling
Rates up to 52 Mbit/s (HSSI)
TIA/EIA-613
High Speed Serial Interface for Data Terminal Equipment
and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment (HSSI)
Cisco HSSI spec
HSSI High Speed Serial Interface Design Specification, Rev.
3.0
ISO/IEC DIS 13818-1
Coding of moving pictures and associated audio
DESCRIPTION
The ECL/HSSI data interface is a plug-in option that is field-installed from the rear of the
SDM-2020 chassis, and provides the Modulator and Demodulator with an emitter
coupled logic (ECL) serial data electrical interface.
This document defines the SDM-2020 Modem Interface along with the ECL/HSSI
Interface as the DCE (Data Communications Equipment), and the Terrestrial (user data
interface) as the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). Transmit data enters the ECL/HSSI
Interface and received data exits it.
10-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
10.1.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ECL/HSSI DATA INTERFACE SPECIFICATION SUMMARY
Terrestrial (User) Data Interface:
Type
Synchronous serial
Data Rate
1.5 to 70 Mbit/s
Signals Supported
RT, RD, ST, TT, SD, TA, CA, LA, LB, LC, TM,
TPSYNC, TDVALID, CD, DF, MF, RPSYNC, RDVALID
Per EIA-612 (10KH ECL)
50-pin mini-D female per EIA-613 (HSSI)
Electrical Connector
Framing Format Compatibility
TM1449 (DVB)
DBS (1.5 to 32 Mbit/s only)
No Framing
10.1.4
TERRESTRIAL (USER) DATA INTERFACE
10.1.4.1
TERRESTRIAL TRANSPORT PROTOCOLS
The Demodulator/Modulator is compatible with TM1449 transfer of MPEG-2 data
signals in the standardized transport layer format. The Demodulator/Modulator also
supports DBS (DBS-PS-007) no framing (187 bytes) format modes (Table 10-1).
Table 10-1 summarizes the primary characteristics of each transport protocol. The
SDM-2020 was designed to comply with these primary interface standards, however;
custom interfaces can be supported as outlined in the data transfer modes definition
section of this document.
Table 10-1. Framing Format Summary
Framing Format Summary
Transport
Protocol
Transport
Package
Sync
Byte
Data
Valid
Strobe
Strobe
Size (bytes)
Sync
Byte
TM1449
(DVB)
188, 204
yes
yes
yes
SYNC active for byte time.
DBS
204
yes
yes
no
SYNC active for bit time.
Extend one bit time for error.
No Framing
187
no
no
no
data stream.
10-2
Comments
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 10-2. Terrestrial Transport Protocols
Condition
TX Data Valid Input
TX Interface
Synchronization
Modes
Serial Data Formats
187 Byte (no
framing) Serial
Format
188 Byte Serial
Format
Serial Format
204 Byte DBS
Serial Format
Description
For all TX framing modes, the data valid input “DVALID” is ignored. Packet structures and
validity of data are based on the programmed frame format.
For all receive framing modes, the data valid output “DVALID” operates as defined in the
frame mode definitions.
The TX interface supports two synchronization modes:
1.
Sync Byte Data Correlation Mode - Frame synchronization is correlated from the
packet input data, based on the embedded sync word (47 HEX). In this mode the
“SYNC,” input is ignored.
2.
External Sync Mode - Frame synchronization is based on the external “SYNC” input.
In this mode the data which occupies the sync byte data position(s) is over written
with a valid sync word (47 HEX) based on the occurrence of the “SYNC” input timing
by the Modem.
The frame synchronization mode is not directly selectable by the user from the front panel
interface. Synchronization mode is derived from the Modulator configuration interface sync
mode selection programmable from the front panel.
The processing order always starts from the MSB (i.e. “0”) of the sync word-byte
(i.e., 01000111).
The 187-byte format contains no framing information. Figure 10-1 shows the general packet
arrangement from the receiver. There is no sync, so the “SYNC” signal is always logic “0”.
Since data is always present, the data valid signal “DVALID” is always logic “1”. The SYNC
and DVALID signals into the Transmitter are not utilized.
The 188 byte serial format consists of 1 sync byte (8 bits, MSB first), followed by 187 payload
bytes (1496 bits). Figure 10-2 shows the signal relationships for the 188 byte serial interface.
The DVALID signal into the Transmitter is not utilized.
The 204 byte serial format consists of 1 sync byte (8 bits, MSB first), 187 payload bytes
(1496 bits), and 16 dummy bytes (128 bits for Reed-Solomon check-sum). Typically the
16 dummy bytes reserved for Reed-Solomon coding are set to zero (logic low), this is a
requirement at the receive interface. Figure 10-3 shows the signal relationships for the 204
byte serial format.
Note: Observe the “DVALID” signal is de-asserted during the last 16 bytes of the frame. The
DVALID signal into the TX is not utilized.
A special case of the 204-byte format is the Digital Broadcast via Satellite (DBS) mode. The
DBS mode is the same as the general 204-byte format except that the sync pulse is only
asserted during the first bit of the sync byte. Figure 10-4 shows the signal relationships for the
204-byte DBS serial format. The DVALID signal into the Transmitter is not utilized.
10-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
1496 Bits Payload
DATA
SYNC
Low
Low
High
High
CLOCK
DVALID
Figure 10-1. 187 Byte (no framing) Serial Format
8 Bits Sync
DATA
0
1
0
0
0
1
1496 Bits Payload
1
8 Bits Sync
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SYNC
CLOCK
DVALID
High
High
Figure 10-2. 188 Byte Serial Format
8 Bits Sync
DATA
0
1
0
0
0
1
1496 Bits Payload
1
128 Bits RS
1
8 Bits Sync
0
SYNC
CLOCK
DVALID
Figure 10-3. 204 Byte Serial Format
10-4
1
0
0
0
1
1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
1496 Bits Payload
8 Bits Sync
DATA
128 Bits RS
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
8 Bits Sync
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
SYNC
CLOCK
DVALID
Figure 10-4. 204 Byte DBS Serial Format
10.1.4.2
TERRESTRIAL SIGNAL DEFINITION
HSSI (High Speed Serial Interface per Cisco Systems, Inc.) and EIA-613 (High Speed
Serial Interface for Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment)
specifications define the high-speed serial port functionality. The serial port is referred to
as the HSSI Interface. The HSSI Interface is compatible with EIA-613/EIA-612.
Additional non-standard signals will be included on reserved pins and are highlighted in
the signal definition table.
Note: Standard EIA-613 defines the interconnection of data terminal equipment (DTE)
and data circuit-termination equipment (DCE) utilizing high speed serial circuits. The
SDM-2020 modulator/demodulator is defined as a DCE.
Refer to Table 10-3 for HSSI pinouts and Figure 10-5 for pinout locations.
Figure 10-6 shows the HSSI signal flow and naming convention for defined signals.
Table 10-3. HSSI/EIA-613 Interface Connector Pinout (J3)
Signal Function
Signal Ground
Receive Timing
DCE Available
Receive Data
Loopback Circuit C
Send Timing
Signal Ground
DTE Available
Terminal Timing
Loopback Circuit A
Send Data
HSSI
Signal
SG
RT
CA
RD
LC
ST
SG
TA
TT
LA
SD
EIA-613
Circuit
102
115
107
104
undefined
114
102
108/2
113
143
103
10-5
Pin # (+, -)
1, 26
2, 27
3, 28
4, 29
5, 30
6, 31
7, 32
8, 33
9, 34
10, 35
11, 36
Circuit
Direction
from DCE
from DCE
from DCE
from DCE
from DCE
to DCE
to DCE
to DCE
to DCE
Comment
Mod/Demod
Demodulator
Mod/Demod
Demodulator
Mod/Demod
Modulator
Mod/Demod
Mod/Demod
Modulator
Mod/Demod
Modulator
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 10-3. HSSI/EIA-613 Interface Connector Pinout (J3)
Signal Function
Loopback Circuit B
Signal Ground
(See Note 1).
TX PSYNC
(See Note 1).
TX DVALID
Reserved (to DCE)
Reserved (to DCE)
Reserved (to DCE)
Signal Ground
Carrier Detect (lock)
HSSI
Signal
LB
SG
TPSYNC
TDVALID
EIA-613
Circuit
144
102
undefined
undefined
SG
CD
Pin # (+, -)
Circuit
Direction
to DCE
Comment
102
undefined
12, 37
13, 38
14, 39
15, 40
16, 41
17, 42
18, 43
19, 44
20
from DCE
Mod/Demod
Mod/Demod
Modulator
Modulator
unused
unused
unused
Mod/Demod
Demodulator
DF
undefined
45
from DCE
Demodulator
MF
undefined
21
from DCE
Modulator
undefined
undefined
142
102
46
22, 47
23, 48
24, 49
25, 50
from DCE
from DCE
from DCE
unused
Demodulator
Demodulator
Mod/Demod
Mod/Demod
to DCE
to DCE
(See Notes 1 and 2).
Demodulator Fault
(See Notes 1 and 3).
Modulator Fault
(See Notes 1 and 3).
Reserved (to DTE)
(See Note 1).
RX PSYNC
(See Note 1).
RX DVALID
Test Mode
Signal Ground
RPSYNC
RDVALID
TM
SG
Notes:
1.
Bold signal function names are non-HSSI defined signals. On Cisco routers there is
no connection to those pins. Refer to the Comtech EF Data web site for an
Application Note describing the use of the SDM-2020 with Cisco routers.
2.
TTL - output.
3.
TTL – open collector output.
10-6
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
PIN 1
PIN 25
PIN 26
PIN 50
PIN 25
PIN 1
PIN 50
PIN 26
Figure 10-5. ECL/HSSI Connector, Pin Location
Figure 10-6. HSSI Signal Flow
Terminal A “+” of the generator is positive with respect to Terminal B “-“ for a binary 1
or ON state. The B terminal of the generator is positive with respect to the A terminal for
a binary 0 or OFF state.
10-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
10.1.4.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
TERRESTRIAL EXTENDED SIGNAL DEFINITION
The HSSI specification has no provision for SYNC or DVALID signals. If terrestrial data
framing is desired, a sync byte (47 hex) is embedded into the data stream every 188 or
204 bytes, as selected in the modulator configuration. The modulator detects the sync
byte and formats the serial interface into a standard, error-protected 204-byte packet. In
order to support TM1449, PSYNC and DVALID are routed to RESERVED (from DCE)
HSSI pins. Refer to Table 10-4 for definition of signals.
Table 10-4. Definition of Signals
Signal
Definition
Transmitter
Synchronization
(TX PSYNC)
Indicates the beginning of a transport packet by signaling the SYNC byte. Active per
defined format timing.
Transmitter Data Valid
(TX DVALID)
Indicates valid data at the interface. Active per defined format timing.
Carrier Detect
(CD)
Indicates Demodulator carrier-tracking loop locked. Status output. TTL output. Active
High (programmable).
Demodulator Fault
(DF)
Open collector TTL signal indicating Demodulator Fault. Active High. External pull-up
required.
Modulator Fault
(MF)
Open collector TTL signal indicating Modulator Fault. Active High. External pull-up
required.
Receiver
Synchronization
(RX PSYNC)
Indicates the beginning of a transport packet by signaling the SYNC byte. Active per
defined format timing.
Receiver Data Valid
(RX DVALID)
Indicates valid data at the interface. Active per defined format timing.
10-8
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
10.1.4.4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
TERRESTRIAL DATA RATE
The terrestrial interface supports synchronous data transfer rates from 1.5 to 70 Mbps.
EIA-612 (Electrical Characteristics for an Interface at Data Signaling Rates up to
52 Mbps) defines the electrical characteristics required for data transfers up to 52 Mbps
using ECL driver/receiver technology.
The HSSI port complies with EIA-612 for transfers less than 52 Mbps.
For short distances, a SCSI-2 cable is satisfactory, although the impedance is in error.
The recommended cable is a computer-grade SCSI-2 cable incorporating twisted,
shielded pairs. The maximum cable length should be ≤ 3 ft (7.62 cm) for the 70 Mbps
transfer rates.
10.1.4.5
TERRESTRIAL ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
All signals are balanced, differentially-driven, and received at standard 10K/100K ECL
levels. Table 10-5 summarizes the electrical properties of the HSSI interface.
Table 10-5. HSSI General Specifications
General Specifications
10.1.4.6
Connectors
50-pin mini-D female for EIA-613 (HSSI) data.
Electrical Properties
Per EIA-612 (10KH ECL).
TTL / TTL open-collector.
Typical Voltages Levels
Differential voltage:
≥ 590 mV, 110Ω load
Input voltage range:
-0.5 to -2.0V
Referenced to receiver common.
TERRESTRIAL TIMING
Refer to Figure 10-7 and Figure 10-8. The nominal interface timing is as follows:
•
Clock is 50% duty cycle
•
Data/control signals transition on the rising (low to high) edge of the clock
•
Data/control signals are stable on the falling (high to low) edge of the clock
Terminal A “+” of the generator is positive with respect to Terminal B “-“ for a binary 1
or ON state. The B terminal of the generator is positive with respect to the A terminal for
a binary 0 or OFF state.
10-9
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CLOCK
DATA
SYNC
DVALID
Figure 10-7. Nominal Interface Timing
Use the timing diagram shown in Figure 10-8 for the worst-case interface timing
specifications.
tsu
th
tw
CLOCK
DATA
SYNC
DVALID
Figure 10-8. Interface Timing
10-10
T
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
The timing parameters for the serial data transmit interface are listed in
Table 10-6, and the timing parameters for the serial data receive interface
are listed in Table 10-7.
Table 10-6. Transmit Timing Parameters
Parameter
Description
Min
Max
Units
f
Operating frequency (1/T)
1.5
100
MHz
T
Clock period (1/f)
10
666
nsec
tw
Clock pulse width
4
-
nsec
tsu
Setup time, DATA or SYNC to CLOCK
3
-
nsec
th
Hold time, CLOCK to DATA or SYNC
invalid
3
-
nsec
Table 10-7. Receive Timing Parameters
Parameter
10.1.4.7
Description
Min
Max
Units
f
Operating frequency (1/T)
1.5
100
MHz
T
Clock period (T)
10
666
nsec
tw
Clock pulse width
4
-
nsec
tsu
Setup time, DATA, DVALID, or SYNC to CLOCK
3
-
nsec
th
Hold time, CLOCK to DATA, DVALID or SYNC invalid
3
-
nsec
TERRESTRIAL TX CLOCK PHASE
The ECL/HSSI interface supports TX clock phase inversion. Terrestrial data is sampled
on the falling edge of TT clock in normal phase selection. In inverted phase selection, the
terrestrial data is sampled on the rising edge of TT clock.
10.1.4.8
TERRESTRIAL RX CLOCK PHASE
The ECL/HSSI interface supports RX clock phase inversion. Terrestrial data (SD) is
synchronous to RT. In normal mode, the falling edge of the RT clock is centered on the
SD signal. In inverted phase selection, the rising edge of RT clock is centered on the SD
signal.
10-11
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
10.1.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
MONITOR AND CONTROL FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION
10.1.5.1
Table 10-8. Signal Definition
Signal
Definition
TA
(Data Terminal
Equipment
Available)
These signals are inputs from the HSSI interface. The state of these
inputs is read by the M&C from the ECL/HSSI interface status register.
LA
(Loopback Circuit A)
LB
(Loopback Circuit A)
CA
(Data
Communication
Equipment
Available)
These signals are outputs from the HSSI interface. The state of these
outputs is controlled by the M&C writing the ECL/HSSI interface control
registers.
LC
(Loopback Circuit C)
TM
(Test Mode)
TA
LA and LB loopback
input control signals
This signal indicates the DTE is available for data transfers. When the
DTE is not available, the DTE status menu reflects DTE unavailable.
(Refer to Function Select Utility Interface menu.) If the DTE TX-IF CNTRL
is set to On (refer to Utility Interface menu for ECL/HSSI), the RF carrier is
On when TA is enabled, and the RF carrier is Off when TA is disabled.
The normal DTE-TX CNTRL setting is Off for most applications.
These signals are available to the M&C, but no functional support is
required.
Upon power-up, the CA output is set to UNAVAILABLE until all modem initialization
has been completed and no faults are detected. After completion of initialization the CA
line is set to AVAILABLE. Any detectable faults that cause the modem to be placed in a
non-operational mode will set CA to UNAVAILABLE.
TM output is set to ACTIVE if the ECL/HSSI interface is commanded into Loopback
mode. TM is INACTIVE for all other modes. LC output is not supported, and is set to
INACTIVE for all modes.
10-12
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
10.1.6
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
FAULTS
Refer to Table 10-9 for ECL/HSSI fault indicators to the HSSI connector (Reserved DCE
pins) from the modem interface.
Table 10-9. Fault Signal Definitions
Signal
10.1.7
Definition
Carrier Detect
(CD)
Indicates Demodulator carrier-tracking loop locked. Status output. TTL output.
Active High (programmable).
Modulator Fault
(DF)
Open collector TTL signal indicating Demodulator fault. Active High. An
external pull-up resistor is required.
Modulator Fault
(MF)
Open collector TTL signal indicating Modulator fault. Active High. An external
pull-up resistor is required.
ECL/HSSI INTERFACE FRONT PANEL MENUS
Refer to Chapter 5, Utility Interface menu.
10.1.8
ECL/HSSI INTERFACE REMOTE CONTROL COMMANDS
Refer to Appendix B.
10-13
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ECL/HSSI TX
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
10-14
Chapter 11.
11.1
G.703 DATA INTERFACE
GENERAL
The following paragraphs describe the G.703 data interface. This plug-in module
provides the physical and electrical interface between external terrestrial data equipment
and the modulator and demodulator.
11.1.1
DESCRIPTION
The G.703 data interface is a plug-in module that inserts into the rear of the modulator
chassis. This interface is designed for full duplex capability and is automatically
configured for simplex TX operation installed in a modulator chassis. The data interface
operates at the digital hierarchy bit rates as defined by ITU-T G.703, except as noted:
•
1.544 Mbps (T1 or E1)
•
2.048 Mbps (T1 or E1
•
6.312 Mbps
•
8.448 Mbps
•
32.064 Mbps
•
34.368 Mbps
•
44.736 Mbps
•
51.840 Mbps (as defined by SONET STS1)
Figure 11-1 is a block diagram of the G.703 data interface.
Connection to external terrestrial data equipment is facilitated by three BNC connectors
and a 9-pin auxiliary connector. The three BNC connectors are Send Data (SD), RX Data
(RD), and External Clock (EXT CLK).
•
The Send Data (SD) input provides TX data to the modulator.
•
The RX Data (RD) output provides RX data from the demodulator.
•
The External Clock (EXT CLK) input provides an external reference for
clocking RX data out of the integrated plesiochronous/Doppler buffer.
The auxiliary connector provides for control and status monitoring when used with
external equipment such as a redundancy switch or monitor/control system.
11-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
SD IN
G.703
75Ω
J3
G.703
RECOVERY
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CLK AND DATA
DC
POWER
J5
RS
MF
RR (CD)
DF
EXT CLK
75Ω
RD OUT
G.703
75Ω
LOOPBACK
AUXILIARY
PROCESSING
AND
CONTROL
J6
J4
MODULATOR/
DEMODULATOR
INTERFACE
M&C
G.703
DRIVER
CLK AND DATA
Figure 11-1. G.703 Interface Block Diagram
The 96-pin DIN connector facilitates the interface to the internal circuitry of the
modulator/demodulator. This connector provides for data flow, control, status, and power
between the modulator/demodulator, and the G.703 data interface module (Figure 11-2).
Operation of the Local Front Panel or Remote Control Port (EIA-232/EIA-485) provides
status monitoring of the G.703 data interface.
11-2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
G.703 INTERFACE
EXT CLK
IN
AUX
J5
J6
J4
G.703
OUT
J3
G.703
IN
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Figure 11-2. G.703 Interface Assembly (PCB)
11-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
11.1.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
Refer to Table 11-1 for applicable documents:
Table 11-1. G.703 Applicable Documents
Document #
Document Title
ITU-T G.703
Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces.
ITU-T G.704
Synchronous Frame Structures Used at Primary and Secondary Hierarchical Levels.
ITU-T G.742
General Considerations on Second Order Multiplex Equipment.
ITU-T G.743
Second Order Digital Multiplex Equipment Operating at 6312 kbit/s and using
Positive Justification.
ITU-T G.745
Second Order Digital Multiplex Equipment Operating at 8448 kbit/s and using
Positive/Zero/Negative Justification.
ITU-T G.747
Second Order Digital Multiplex Equipment Operating at 6312 kbit/s and
Multiplexing three Tributaries at 2048 kbit/s.
ITU-T G.751
Digital Multiplex Equipment Operating at the Third Order Bit Rate of 34,368 kbit/s
and the Fourth Order Bit Rate of 139,264 kbit/s and using Positive Justification.
ITU-T G.752
Characteristics of Digital Multiplex Equipment Based on a Second Order Bit Rate
of 6312 kbit/s and using Positive Justification.
ITU-T G.753
Third Order Digital Multiplex Equipment Operating at 34,368 kbit/s and using
Positive/Zero/Negative Justification.
ITU-T G.823
The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are Based on the
2048 kbit/s Hierarchy.
ITU-T G.824
The Control of Jitter and Wander within Digital Networks which are Based on the
1544 kbit/s Hierarchy.
Bellcore
SONET STS-1.
SP/6065
Comtech EF Data Specification, Video Modem Framing Modes and Interface.
11-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
11.1.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
SPECIFICATION SUMMARY
Table 11-2. Specification Summary
General:
Per ITU-T G.703 where applicable unless otherwise specified
Data Rates
(programmable)
1.544, 2/048 6.312, 8.448, 32.064, 34.368, 44.736, or 51.840 Mbps
(per Bellcore SONET STS-1)
Internal Clock Accuracy
10 ppm
Line Coding
AMI (none), HDB3, B8ZS, or B3ZS
Interface Loopback
ON/OFF
Interface Loop-Through
ON/OFF
Jitter Characteristics
Per ITU-T G.823 and ITU-T G.824 where applicable
TX 2047 Pattern
Generator
ON/OFF (programmable test mode)
TX Data Interface:
Input Signal
Characteristics
Per ITU-T G.703
Input Impedance
75Ω
Connector Type
BNC (female)
Auxiliary Functions Port:
Signals
MF (modulator fault, open collector TTL output)
RS (modulator output control, TTL input)
Connector Type
9 pin sub-D (female)
Controlled Functions:
TX Data Rate
TX Terrestrial Line Coding
Interface Loop-Through
Interface Loopback
Buffer Size
Buffer Clock Source
Buffer Frame Structure
Buffer Center
External Reference Frequency
TX Data Fault
TX 2047 Pattern
Monitor Functions:
TX Interface Faults
Clock activity, data/AIS, TX PLL, FPGA program
11-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
11.1.3.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
TRANSMIT SPECIFICATIONS
•
TX Data Rate 1.544 Mbps
•
TX Data Rate 2.048 Mbps
•
TX Data Rate 6.312 Mbps
•
TX Data Rate 8.448 Mbps
•
TX Data Rate 32.064 Mbps
•
TX Data Rate 34.368 Mbps
•
TX Data Rate 44.736 Mbps
•
TX Data Rate 51.840 Mbps
11.1.3.2
TRANSMIT DATA RATE 6.312 MBPS
Parameter
Requirements
Data Rate
The input bit rate is 6.312 Mbps ± 30 ppm.
Line Coding
The line code can be selected between B8ZS and AMI for data rate
6.312 Mbps.
Pulse Shape
Nominal pulse shape is rectangular and must meet the pulse mask per
ITU-T-G.703, Figure 12/G.703.
Jitter Characteristics
Input Jitter: The unit tolerates input jitter levels specified in ITU-T-G.824,
Figure 3/G.824, and Table 2/G.824.
11.1.3.3
TRANSMIT DATA RATE 8.448 MBPS
Parameter
Requirements
Data Rate
The input bit rate is 8.448 Mbps ± 30 ppm.
Line Coding
The line code can be selected between HDB3 and AMI for data rate
8.448 Mbps.
Pulse Shape
Nominal pulse shape is rectangular with a pulse rate of 59 ns. All marks of valid
signal level must meet the pulse mask per ITU-T-G.703, Figure 16.703.
Jitter Characteristics
Input Jitter: The unit tolerates input jitter levels specified in ITU-T-G.824,
Figure 3/G.823, and Table 2/G.823.
11.1.3.4
TRANSMIT DATA RATE 32.064 MBPS
Parameter
Requirements
Data Rate
The input bit rate is 32.064 Mbps ± 10 ppm.
Line Coding
The line code can be selected between HDB3 and AMI for data rate
32.064 Mbps.
Pulse Shape
The pulse shape falls within the mask of ITU-T_G.703, Figure 13/G.703.
Jitter Characteristics
Input Jitter: The unit tolerates input jitter levels specified in ITU-T-G.824,
Figure 3/G.824, and Table 2/G.824.
11-6
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
11.1.3.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
TRANSMIT DATA RATE 34.368 MBPS
Parameter
Requirements
Data Rate
The input bit rate is 34.368 Mbps ± 20 ppm.
Line Coding
The line code can be selected between HDB3 and AMI for data rate
34.368 Mbps.
Pulse Shape
The pulse shape is nominally rectangular. All marks of valid signal level must
conform to the mask of ITU-T-G.703, Figure 17/G.703.
Jitter Characteristics
Input Jitter: The unit tolerates input jitter levels specified in ITU-T-G.824,
Figure 3/G.823, and Table 2/G.823.
11.1.3.6
TRANSMIT DATA RATE 44.736 MBPS
Parameter
Requirements
Data Rate
The input bit rate is 44.736 Mbps ± 20 ppm.
Line Coding
The line code can be selected between B3ZS and AMI for data rate
44.736 Mbps.
Pulse Shape
The pulse shape for an isolated pulse falls within the mask of ITU-T-G.703,
Figure 14/G.703.
Jitter Characteristics
Input Jitter: The unit tolerates input jitter levels specified in ITU-T-G.824, Figure
3/G.824, and Table 2/G.824.
11.1.3.7
TRANSMIT DATA RATE 51.840 MBPS
Parameter
Requirements
Data Rate
The input bit rate is 51.840 Mbps ± 20 ppm.
Line Coding
The line code can be selected between B3ZS and AMI for data rate
51.840 Mbps.
Pulse Shape
Amplitude:
± 1.75 V (± 10%)
Pulse Width:
9.64 ns (± 10%)
Pulse Mask:
per TA-NWT-000253 (STS-1)
Jitter Characteristics
Input Jitter Tolerance: The unit tolerates input jitter levels specified in
ITU-T-G.824, Table 2/G.824 scaled from those defined for 44.763 Mbps
to apply to the 51.840 Mbps.
11-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
11.1.4
11.1.4.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
GENERAL TRANSMIT SPECIFICATIONS
TRANSMIT 2047 PATTERN GENERATION
The unit supplies a 2047 test pattern substitution into the TX data path when commanded
by the host unit.
11.1.4.2
11.1.4.3
INPUT PORT RETURN LOSS
Frequency Range
(kHz)
Return Loss
(dB)
Data Rate/40 to Data Rate/20
12
Data Rate/20 to Data Rate
18
Data Rate to 1.5 x Data Rate
14
TRANSMIT SPECIFICATIONS
Parameter
Specification
AIS/Data Fault Detection
The unit provides AIS/Data fault detection on the incoming TX data stream.
TX AIS Assertion
The unit provides AIS substitution into the TX data path when commanded
by the host unit.
RX Output Stable
The unit provides data stable into the RX data path when installed in the
modulator. Either RX data stable is removed when interface loop-back or
interface loop through is turned ON.
Clock Activity Detection
When installed in a modulator the unit provides activity detection for TX
Terrestrial Clock. TX clock activity faults are communicated to the host unit
and the fallback is SCT.
TX PLL Fault Detection
The unit provides TX PLL fault detection. A fault is indicated upon the failure
of either the G.703 clock recovery circuit or the TX clock dejitter circuit.
When fault detection occurs the SCT is selected.
FPGA Program Error
Detection/Reporting
The unit detects TX and RX FPGA programming errors and report errors to
the host unit.
11-8
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
11.1.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
INTERFACE LOOP - THROUGH
The interface provides a “loop-through” mode of operation. The loop-through mode is
intended to allow synchronization of RX data (RD) to Send Data (SD) when a
demodulator/modulator are co-located. Loop-through mode is selectable only when the
G.703 interface is installed in a modulator.
11.1.5.1
INTERFACE OPERATION WITHIN THE MODULATOR:
When loop-through mode is executed (turned ON) Send Data (SD), at the input to the
interface, is routed to both the interface RX Data (RD) output and the host modulator data
input. This mode of operation does not interfere with transmission of data over the
satellite link. Transparent to the user, the following actions occur on the interface:
11.1.5.2
•
Recovered clock and data from the Send Data (SD) input is looped to the
interface receive data path.
•
Interface receive data rate and line coding are set the same as TX.
•
The RX Doppler/plesiochronous buffer is set for minimum depth and buffer
reference clock is set to TX Terrestrial.
INTERFACE OPERATION WITHIN DEMODULATOR
Although loop-through mode is not selectable when the G.703 interface is installed in a
demodulator, the following items must be considered when setting up the demodulator.
•
Connect RX Data (RD) output of the co-located modulator to the Send Data
(SD) of the co-located demodulator.
•
Set the interface TX data rate and line coding the same as the co-located
modulator.
•
Set the G.703 interface buffer clock reference to TX Terrestrial.
SD
RD
Modulator
Tx IF
Demodulator
Rx IF
SD
RD
Figure 11-3. Co-Located Modulator and Demodulator
11-9
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
11.1.6
11.1.6.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
TEST MODES
INTERFACE LOOPBACK
The modulator/demodulator provides an “interface loopback” test mode of operation.
When loopback mode is executed (turned ON), Send Data (SD) at the input to the
interface is routed to both the interface RX Data (RD) output and the host modulator data
input. Send Data (SD) is routed through as much of the interface circuitry as possible
before being returned to the RX Data (RD) output. This mode of operation does not
disrupt transmission of data over the satellite link when installed in a modulator.
11.1.7
11.1.7.1
•
In a modulator application, the RX Data rate and line coding is automatically
set to be compatible with the TX settings.
•
In a demodulator application, TX data rate and line coding is automatically
set to be compatible with RX settings and the buffer reference clock is set to
TX terrestrial.
TERRESTRIAL INTERFACE TYPES
SEND DATA (SD), RECEIVE DATA (RD), AND EXTERNAL CLOCK
CONNECTORS J3, J4, AND J6
The Send Data (SD) (J3), RX Data (RD) (J4), and EXT CLK (J6) connectors are all BNC
type connectors and are terminated into 75Ω.
11.1.7.2
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS CONNECTOR, J5
The connector is a 9-pin sub-miniature D female, with threaded jack nuts.
Modulator Fault (MF) and Demodulator Fault (DF) are single-ended open collector
signals, where:
Voh=12V max. and Vol=0.5V max. @ Iol=8 ma.
A pull-up resistor external to the equipment is required.
For (MF) and (DF) a fault is indicated by an OFF (Vout = Hi) open collector transistor
and the normal OK state is indicated by an ON transistor (Vout = Lo).
The Carrier Detect (CD) signal is a TTL output. When CD is high, it indicates the
demodulator is locked.
TX IF ON/OFF: It is possible to use RTS signal on the auxiliary connector
for turning the transmit carrier ON or OFF. The RS signal is enabled for this mode of
operation and the polarity of the RS signal is programmed by the user.
11-10
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 11-3. Auxiliary Connector, J5
Signal Function
Name
Demodulator Fault
Indicator
DF
Not Used
N/A
Type
1
GND
2
O
Comment
Signal Ground
Demodulator Summary Fault
Redundancy switch application, TTL open collector
output
RTS, TX OFF
Modulator Fault Indicator
Pin #
MF
3,5,8,9
N/A
Wire to spare pad
4
I
Modulator, TTL input
6
O
Modulator Summary Fault
Redundancy switch application, TTL open collector
output
Carrier Detect
11.1.8
CD
7
O
Demodulator, TTL output
MODULATOR INTERFACE
The physical interface to the modulator is a 96-pin DIN connector. The interface data
transfer format is 187 byte (No Framing) Parallel Format.
11.1.9
POWER REQUIREMENTS
The G.703 interface requires +5 VDC (± 0.25V), +12 VDC (± 0.50V) and -12 VDC
(± 0.50V) supplied from the base modulator. The power is supplied through the 96-pin
(DIN) connector. During normal operation, the unit requires a maximum of 1A at
+5 VDC, 100mA at +12V, and 50mA at -12V.
11.1.10
G.703 INTERFACE FRONT PANEL MENUS
The applicable menus are dependent on the G.703 interface application. Refer to Chapter
5.
11.1.11
G.703 REMOTE INTERFACE COMMANDS
The applicable remote commands are dependent on the G.703 interface application. Refer
to Appendix A.
11-11
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
11-12
Chapter 12. SMPTE-310
DATA INTERFACE
12.1
GENERAL
This plug-in module provides the physical and electrical interface between external
terrestrial data equipment and the modulator. The SMPTE-310 data interface is based on
the DVB’s Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) used with the SDM-2020 Modulator
developed for video and high-speed data applications. The data is input/output on a BNC
female connector as an 800-mV signal with biphase mark encoding. A separate auxiliary
connector provides fault status.
12.1.1
12.1.2
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
•
Comtech EF Data SDM-2020 Modulator Specification, SP/5611
•
SMPTE 310M Synchronous Serial Interface for MPEG-2 Digital
Transport Stream
•
TM 1449, Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and Similar
Professional Equipment
DESCRIPTION
The SMPTE-310 data interface is a plug-in module that inserts into the rear panel of the
chassis. The data interface provides a physical and electrical connection between the
external terrestrial circuit and the internal circuitry of the unit. By convention, a modem
is Data Communications Equipment (DCE) where transmit data enters the data interface
and receive data exits. The data interface has full-duplex capability but is automatically
configured for simplex-transmit or simplex-receive operation, depending upon whether it
is plugged into a modulator or demodulator chassis.
Figure 12-1 shows the SMPTE 310 data interface block diagram. At a functional level,
the data interface has four I/O ports. Transmitted data by the modulator enters the
SMPTE-310 data interface at the TX input as a synchronous serial bit stream, while data
received by a demodulator is sent by the data interface at the RX outputs as a
synchronous serial bit stream. The TX and RX serial data is biphase-mark encoded. The
modem interface is byte-oriented interface with clock, data, and synchronous signals.
Finally, the auxiliary function port provides status outputs for modulator and demodulator
faults as well as input for control and transmission.
12-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
96 Pin
DIN
Tx
Data
75 Ohm
BNC-F
J6
SMPTE 310
Recovery
DC
Power
J5
DF
Auxiliary
Terrestrial
Interface
Signal
MF
/CD
RTS
Processing
Loopback
Level
Translators
M&C
Rx
Data
75 Ohm
BNC-F
J4
J3
SMPTE 310
Generator
Figure 12-1. SMPTE-310M Interface Block Diagram
12-2
Modulator /
Demodulator
Interface
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Figure 12-2 illustrates the SMPTE 310M module assembly.
J6
J5
J4
J3
.
Figure 12-2. Module Assembly, Part NO. AS/6175-2.
12.1.3
SMPTE-310M DATA INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
Table 12-1. Specification Summary
Video Interface (Terrestrial)
Signal Type
Biphase mark coded synchronous serial data per SMPTE-310M and TM 1449.
Connector Type
75Ω BNC.
Interface and
Connector
Impedance
Resistive 75Ω unbalanced, per SMPTE-310M.
TX and RX Signal
Level
800 mV ± 10% per SPMTE-310M.
DC Offset
0.0 V ± 0.5 V.
Rise And Fall Times
The rise and fall times, determined between the 20 and 80% amplitude points
shall be within 0.4 ns and 5.0 ns and shall not differ by more than 1.6 ns, per
SMPTE-310M.
Overshoot
10% maximum (on both rising and falling edges) per SPMTE-310M.
Receiver Sensitivity
The receiver shall operate with up to 3 dB amplitude loss at 1/2 the interface
clock.
Return Loss
30 dB minimum, 100 kHz to the interface clock frequency per
SMPTE-310M.
ATSC Data Rate
8VSB: 19.392 658 46 Mbit/s = (4.5 E6) x (684/286) x (564/313)
12-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 12-2. Specification Summary (Continued)
Video Interface (Terrestrial)
Clock
Accuracy
Programmed data rate ± 100 ppm.
Clock Jitter,
Drift And
Wander
The interface clock frequency error (drift limit) shall not exceed ± 2.8 ppm.
The rate of frequency change (drift rate) shall not exceed 0.028 ppm/s.
The jitter in the timing of the interface signal transitions shall not exceed 2 ns p-p, measured over a
bandwidth of 1 Hz to 1/100 of the interface clock frequency.
Cable Length,
Typical
RG59
180 meters (591 feet)
Belden 8281
250 meters (820 feet)
Auxiliary Function Port
Signals
DF (Demodulator Fault, open-collector output).
CD (Demodulator Carrier Detect, TTL output).
Connector
9 Pin D, female.
Monitor and Control
Monitored
Functions
TX – PLL Lock (monitors presence of input data)
TX – State of RTS input on auxiliary function port
TX - FPGA load failure.
RX - FIFO Underflow/overflow.
RX - PLL lock.
RX - FPGA load failure.
Controlled
Functions
Interface Loopback.
Interface Loop-through
General
Framing
Formats
(to be
provided by
the
demodulator,
not this
interface)
187 (no framing, pass-through mode).
188 (DVB/MPEG2 frame consisting of a sync. byte and 187 data bytes).
204 (frame consisting of sync. byte , 187 data bytes and 16 Reed-Solomon check bytes).
Environmental
Operating
Temperature
Storage
Temperature
0 to + 50°C (32 to + 122°F)
-40 to + 70°C (-40 to +158°F)
Up to 95% non-condensing.
Humidity
12-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 12-3. Specification Summary (Continued)
Physical
Size
SDM-2020 plug-in module compatible.
Hot Pluggable
Not required. Unit power is turned off prior to removal or insertion of the data interface.
12.1.3.1
INTERFACE LOOPBACK MODE
In loopback mode, data entering the TX connector is returned after passing through the
interface. The data entering the interface at the TX input is routed all the way through the
TX path and out to the modulator at J1. All TX signals going to the modulator (TTL level
before the TTL to LVDS translator) also are outed back to the RX path in place of the
normal signals which would be coming from the demodulator.
12.1.3.2
•
In a Modulator, TX data continues to enter the modulator and is TX during
loopback.
•
In a Demodulator, satellite data is not routed through the SMPTE-310M
Data Interface.
INTERFACE LOOP-THROUGH MODE
In loop-through mode, operation is the same as in loopback mode, however, the
test mode indications are not activated.
12.1.3.3
12.1.3.4
TX AND RX TERRESTRIAL DATA INTERFACE CONNECTOR (J3, J4,
AND J6)
J3, J4
SMPTE-310M RX Data Outputs, BNC female. Both outputs are active
simultaneously.
J6
SMPTE-310M TX Data Input, BNC female.
AUXILIARY FUNCTION PORT
The following paragraphs describe the electrical and physcial properties of the
auxiliary function port.
12.1.3.4.1
Auxiliary Interface Electrical Specification
This port provides input/output of modem-specific signals.
12-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Single ended open collector outputs (external pull-up resistor required) provide
indicated Modulator Faults (MF) and Demodulator Faults (DF). For MF and DF,
a fault is indicated by an OFF (Vout = Hi) open collector transistor and the
normal OK state indicates an ON transistor (Vout = Lo). MF and DF are routed
directly from the modulator or demodulator respectively. The characteristics of
these outputs are:
Voh = 12V maximum
Vol = 0.5V maximum at Io1 = 8 mA
A carrier detect (CD) output signal provides an indication that the demodulator is locked.
The output is TTL compatible. CD is routed directly from the demodulator. The default
state of the CD is high when the unit is locked, but the sense will be programmable
(function provided at the system level).
A Request to Send (RTS) input is provided to allow for remote control of the modulator
transmission carrier. The ability to enable/disable control of the modulator via this signal,
as well as the signal polarity, is programmed by the user (function provided at the system
level).
12.1.3.4.2
Auxiliary Interface Connector –J5
This port provides input/output of the modem-specific signals. The connector is
9-pin subminiature D female, with threaded jack nuts.
Table 12-4. Auxiliary Interface Connector –J5
Signal Function
Demodualtor Fault
Indicator
Name
DF
Pin #
Type
1
GND
2
O
Comment
Signal Ground
Demodulator Summary Fault. Open Collector
Redundancy switch appplication
Request to Send
RTS
3
N/C
4
I
5
N/C
Modulator Request to send. TX control. TTL
Modulator Fault
Indication
MF
6
O
Modulator Summary Fault. Open collector.
Redundancy switch application.
Carrier Detect
CD
7
O
Demodulator. Carriewr detect. TTL
Legend:
O = Output
I = Input
N/C = No Connection
12-6
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
12.1.4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
SMPTE-310M/SSI INTERFACE DEFAULTS
RTS Control
Off
RTS State
Normal
Data or Clock Polarity
Normal
Frame Format
188
Loss of Data
Alarm
Clock/Data SYNC
Correlate on data
12-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
12.1.5
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
SMPTE-310M/SSI INTERFACE FRONT PANEL MENUS
Refer to Chapter 5, Utility Interface menu.
12.1.6
SMPTE-310M/SSI REMOTE INTERFACE COMMANDS
Refer to Appendix A.
12-8
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
12-9
Chapter 13. ASI/LVDS
DATA INTERFACE
13.1
ASI/LVDS INTERFACE
This plug-in module provides the physical and electrical interface between external
terrestrial data equipment and the modulator. The ASI/LVDS implements the two most
popular DVB data interfaces. The data is input/output on a BNC female connector as an
800 mV signal with biphase mark encoding. A separate auxiliary connector provides fault
status.
13.1.1
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
EN 50083-9, Interfaces for CATV/SMATV Headends and Similar Professional Equipment
13.1.2
DESCRIPTION
The ASI/LVDS data interface is a plug-in module that inserts into the rear panel of the
chassis. The data interface provides a physical and electrical connection between the
external terrestrial circuit and the internal circuitry of the unit. By convention, a modem
is Data Communications Equipment (DCE) where transmit data enters the data interface
and receive data exits. The data interface has full-duplex capability but is automatically
configured for simplex-transmit or simplex-receive operation, depending upon whether it
is plugged into a modulator or demodulator chassis.
Figure 13-1 shows the ASI/LVDS data interface block diagram. At a functional level, the
data interface has three ASI I/O ports. One port is LVDS interface and an auxiliary
connector. Transmitted data into the modulator enters the ASI/LVDS data interface at the
TX input as a synchronous serial data stream, while data received by a demodulator is
sent by the data interface at the RX outputs as a synchronous serial data stream. The ASI
data stream is a serial, high-speed 8B/10 encoded signal, while the outputs for modulator
and demodulator faults as well as input for control and transmission. Figure C-21
illustrates the ASI/LVDS module assembly.
13-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
BNC-F
J3-B
Tx
ASI J4-A
ASI
Recovery
Tx ASI
Rx LVDS
Terrestrial
Interface
J5
96 Pin DIN
Sync
Tx LVDS
Level
Translators
DValid
DC
Power
Loopback
LVDS
Clk
Tx Termination
Jumper
J6
D0-D7
Modulator /
Demodulator
Interface
MF
DF
Aux I / O
Tx On / Off
Ext Clk
Recovery,
Processing
And ASI
/ LVDS
Selection
Rx
ASI
J7
BNC-F
ASI
Generator
M&C
Interface
Rx ASI
Figure 13-1. ASI / LVDS Interface Block Diagram
Note: Manufacturer has discovered that PCBs were manufactured with J3-B and J4-A
incorrectly identified. Connector J3 is ‘B’ and J4 is ‘A’. If any problem or concern is
evident, do not hesitate to contact Comtech EF Data, Customer Support department.
13.1.3
ASI/LVDS INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS
A 75Ω coaxial cable (Belden 8281 or equivalent) is recommended for all ASI connectors.
Typical coaxial cable length is up to 70 meters (230 feet) with good quality coaxial cable.
Typical attenuation of up to 8 dB at 270 MHz is permitted. The following cables, or an
equivalent computer grade cable incorporating twisted, shielded pairs, are recommended
for the LVDS interface:
•
Belden type LV Computer M9768
•
Belden 8175
The Belden 8175 has a lower capacitance, however it has a larger diameter and requires
the selection of an appropriate connector shell. The typical cable length for the
serial/parallel interfaces is ≤ 5 meters (16.405 feet).
13-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 13-1. ASI/LVDS Specifications
General Specifications
Data Framing Formats
188, 204 byte packets per ETS 300 421, and None.
Hot Pluggable
Not required. Unit power is turned off before removal or insertion of the
data interface.
ASI Specifications
Data Rate
1.5 to 100 Mbit/s ASI.
Clock Rate Uncertainty
Programmed data rate ± 100 ppm.
Transport Clock ASI
The transport rate is 270 Mbit/s for all data rates.
Impedance
75Ω.
Return Loss
15 dB, frequencies, 5 to 270 MHz.
Loop Functions
Loopback and Loop Thru
Connectors
BNC female, 75Ω.
Electrical Properties
Per EN 80053-9.
Packet Types
Burst or distributed.
Signal Types
Serial data.
Voltage Level
800 mV ± 10% into 75Ω.
ASI Data Loop 3 dB
Frequency, TX Only
Wide: 2 Hz
Jitter Tolerance
Meets ITU-T G.823 (3/93) and ITU-T G.824 (3/93)
Jitter Transfer
≤ 0.5 dB peaking up to cutoff frequency.
-20 dB per decade beyond cutoff.
Cable Length, Typical
50 meters (165 feet), RG59
Narrow: 0.3 Hz
70 meters (230 feet), Belden 8281
Delay Variation Of Interface
And Modulator
8 bits maximum, QPSK all data rates,
8PSK 2/3 and 5/6 all data rates. 8PSK 8/9 less than 80 Mbit/s
LVDS Specifications
Data Rate
1.5 to 100 Mbit/s, parallel LVDS
Clock Rate Uncertainty
Programmed data rate + 100 ppm
Connectors
25-Pin D female per EN 80053-9.
Same connector is either TX or RX data (See Loopback / Loop Thru)
Electrical Properties
per EN 80053-9
Signal Types
D0 – D7, Sync, Dvalid and Clock per EN 80053-9
Data synchronization is detected by correlating the data stream for the
MPEG2 sync pattern per ETS 300 421.
13-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Table 13-1. ASI/LVDS Specifications (Continued)
Auxiliary Specifications
Fault Signal
MF (modulator fault) and DF (demodulator fault). OC-TTL fault outputs.
TX ON / OFF
TTL input, when enabled this signal turns the TX carrier ON / OFF.
Ext Clock
Pin(s) reserved, but not defined
Monitor & Control
Interface Select
ASI or LVDS
Auxiliary Functions
Transmitter Control: TX IF Control ON / OFF
Polarity select Normal or Inverted
Controlled
Functions
Interface Select: ASI or LVDS
Interface Loopback
Interface Loop Thru
Data Rate
TX ASI Data Input J3 / J4 Select
Loss of data. Programmable as Fault or Alarm
Clock, Normal or Inverted
Data, Normal or Inverted
Monitored
Functions
Loss of TX Data (Data Connector Removed): The modulator indicates a loss of sync
(framed modes) and transmits all 1s in the data portion of the frame.
The demodulator detects the presence of all ones and reports it to the display and
remote port.
TX clock PLL program error
Data violations (TX)
FIFO Faults
ASI Data Loop BW
Selection
Wide and Narrow
Additional M&C
Monitored
Functions
Loss of TX Data or Clock (Data Connector Removed): The modulator indicates a
loss of sync (frame and mode) and transmits all 1s in the data portion of the frame.
The demodulator detects the presence of all ones and reports it to the display and
remote port.
13-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
13.1.3.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
JUMPER SELECTION
There are jumpers located on the ASI/LVDS card that require proper selection. See
Figure 13-2. A description of the jumpers and application data is as follows:
J7
•
J6
JP1
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
•• ••
••
JP2
•• ••
J5
•• ••
Jumper In
OFF
Position
•• ••
• •
• •
JP3 JP4
Jumper In
ON
Position
J4-A
•
• •
• •
J3-B
•
Figure 13-2. ASI/LVDS Jumper Selection
Jumper
Description
JP1
Selects whether the LVDS-DVB connector, J6, operates as input or an output
JP2, JP3, and JP4
A single jumper is placed on JP2, JP3, or JP4.
13-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
13.1.3.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
APPLICABLE JUMPER DATA
When the ASI portion of the interface is used JP1 is normally positioned Off so that the
pins are not connected. Also, JP2 is normally set to On. This allows installation of the
interface in either the modulator or demodulator without moving any jumpers. Refer to
Table 13-2 for Modulator/Demodulator Jumper Selection.
Table 13-2. Modulator /Demodulator Jumper Selection
Modulator Jumper Selection
Jumper
ON/OFF
Description
JP1
ON
Selects J6, the LVDS-DVB connector as an input.
JP1
OFF
Normal Setting. Selects J6 as an output for Loopback or Loop Thru operation in
conjunction with the ASI signals.
JP2
ON
Normal Setting. Selects pins 2 and 15 of J6 as GND.
JP3
Not
Used
JP4
ON
Selects pins 2 and 15 as REFCLKB and REFCLKA outputs from J6. This is used as
a byte clock reference by other equipment.
JP4
OFF
Normal Setting.
For future use.
Demodulator Jumper Selection
Jumper
ON/OFF
JP1
ON
Selects J6 as an input for loopback operation.
JP1
OFF
Normal Setting. Selects J6, LVDS-DVB connector, as an output for RX data. Also, it
is used for loopback operation in conjunction with the ASI signals.
JP2
ON
Normal Setting. Selects pins 2 and 15 of J6 as GND.
JP3
Not
Used
For future use.
JP4
Not
Used
Jumper belongs on J2.
13.1.4
Description
LOOPBACK
In Loopback the TX input from the terrestrial circuit is routed through the interface to the
terrestrial RX output. In a modulator chassis, TX data continues to enter the modulator
and the TX IF is transmitted during Loopback.
In the demodulator, satellite data is interrupted during Loopback and the data entering the
TX connector is returned to the RX connector. Demodulator data from the satellite is not
routed to the modulator by the data interface. This is a test mode and illuminates the
TEST LED.
13-6
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
13.1.4.1
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
LOOPBACK CONNECTION
Refer to Table 13-3 for additional requirements for Loopback.
Table 13-3. Loopback Connections
ASI Interface is active
in Modulator
Loops ASI input, J3 (or J4), to ASI output, J7. If JP1 is Off, then J3 (J4)
also loops to J6, the LVDS-DVB parallel output
The LVDS signal contains D0-D7, Sync, Dvalid, and Clock
LVDS Interface is
active in Modulator
If J1 is On, then J6 (LVDS-DVB input) is looped to the ASI output J7.
ASI Interface is active
in Demodulator
JP1 is Off (Normal): When Loopback is engaged the TX ASI (J3) input
connects simultaneously to the RX ASI (J7) and to the RX LVDS
connector (J6). The LVDS signal contains D0-D7, Sync, Dvalid, and Clock
JP1 is On: When Loopback is engaged the TX LVDS (J6) input connects
to the RX ASI (J7) connector.
LVDS Interface is
active (output) in
Demodulator
JP1 is ON: When Loopback is engaged the TX LVDS (J6) input connects
to the RX ASI connector (J7). The LVDS signal contains D0-D7, Sync,
Dvalid, and Clock.
JP1 is OFF (Normal): When Loopback is engaged the TX ASI input
connects to the RX ASI connector and to the RX LVDS connector. The
LVDS signal contains D0-D7, Sync, Dvalid, and Clock.
13.1.4.2
LOOP THROUGH
The operation of Loop Thru is the same as Loopback except the normal operating mode
not a test mode, and the TEST LED does not illuminate.
13.1.5
ASI CONNECTOR PINOUT
J3, J4
Transmit Data Input, BNC female
J7
Receive Data Output, BNC female
13-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
13.1.6
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
LVDS CONNECTOR PINOUT (J6)
The LVDS connector is a 25-Pin D female type, with threaded jack nuts.
LVDS signal levels are as defined in EN50083-9. The differential sense of all signal pairs
is a logic “1” when “A” is positive with respect to “B.” Some DBS applications require
an inverted data or clock polarity and control of the signal polarity (normal or inverted) is
provided. Input/Output (I/O) of the interface is determined by:
•
Whether it is plugged into a modulator or demodulator
•
Loopback or Loop Thru programming.
Signal Function/Name
Pin #
Type
Comment
Clock A
1
I/O
Mod / Demod
System Gnd / REFCLKB
2
O / Gnd
Mod / Demod
Demod – GND only, no clock available
Data 7 A(MSB/Serial)
3
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 6 A
4
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 5 A
5
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 4 A
6
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 3 A
7
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 2 A
8
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 1 A
9
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 0 A
10
I/O
Mod / Demod
DVALID A
11
I/O
Mod / Demod
SYNC A
12
I/O
Mod / Demod
Cable Shield
13
I/O
Mod / Demod
Clock B
14
I/O
Mod / Demod
System Gnd / REFCLKA
15
O / Gnd
Mod / Demod
Demod – GND 0nly, no clock available
Data 7 B
16
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 6 B
17
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 5 B
18
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 4 B
19
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 3 B
20
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 2 B
21
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 1 B
22
I/O
Mod / Demod
Data 0 B
23
I/O
Mod / Demod
DVALID B
24
I/O
Mod / Demod
SYNC B
25
I/O
Mod / Demod
13-8
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
13.1.7
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
AUXILIARY CONNECTOR PINOUT (J5)
The auxiliary connector is a 9-Pin D female connector.
Single-ended signals, such as the faults MF and DF, are open collector where:
Voh=12V max. and Vol=0.5V max. @ Iol=8 ma.
A pull-up resistor external to the equipment is required. A fault is indicated in the
modulator or demodulator when the open collector is OFF. An ON collector indicates an
OK status.
Ext Clk is an LVDS input.
Carrier Detect is a TTL output. TX IF ON / OFF is a single ended TTL input.
Refer to Table 13-4 for the 9-Pin D female connector.
Table 13-4. Auxiliary Connector Pinout (J5)
Signal Function
Name
Demod Fault Indicator
DF
Pin #
Type
1
GND
2
O
Comment
Signal Ground
Demodulator Summary Fault
Redundancy switch application
SCT-A
TX IF ON / OFF
EXT Clk-B
SCT-A
3
O
LVDS Clock (A) From Modulator
TXOn-Off
4
I
TTL
MC-B
5
I
Demodulator, LVDS (TDB)
MF
6
O
Modulator Summary Fault
Mod Fault Indicator
Redundancy switch application
Carrier Detect
CD
7
O
Demodulator
SCT-B
SCT-B
8
O
LVDS Clock (B) From Modulator
EXT Clk-A
MC-A
9
I
Demodulator, LVDS (TBD)
Note: Ext Clk is not available.
13-9
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
ASI/LVDS Data Interfaces
13.1.8
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI/LVDS INTERFACE DEFAULTS
Interface Select
ASI
TX-IF Control
Off
Data or Clock
Normal
Frame Format
188
Loss of Data
Alarm
Clock/Data Sync
Correlate on data
Loopback / Loop Thru
OFF
Loop Bandwidth
Wide
ASI Link Select
J3
13-10
Chapter 14.
FULLY ACCESSIBLE
SYSTEM TOPOLOGY
(FAST) OPTIONS
Comtech EF Data’s FAST system allows immediate implementation of different options
through the user interface keypad. Some FAST options are available through the basic
platform unit, while others require that the unit be equipped with optional hardware or
that the hardware be installed in the field.
The options available through the FAST architecture include:
Option
Minimum Software Version
16QAM-DVB
7.1.2 *
8PSK-DVB
5.3.1 *
OEM LCD
2.1.2
* Note: Units that shipped prior to July 1998 requirea factory-installed hardware
upgrade to operate with 8PSK-DVB modulation.
14.1
FAST SYSTEM THEORY
FAST is an enhancement feature available only in Comtech EF Data products, enabling
on-location upgrade of the operating feature set—in the rack—without removing a
modulator from the setup. When service requirements change, the operator can upgrade
the topology of the modulator to meet those requirements within minutes after
confirmation by Comtech EF Data. This accelerated upgrade can be accomplished only
because of FAST’s extensive use of programmable devices incorporating Comtech EF
Data-proprietary signal processing techniques. These techniques allow the use of a
unique access code to enable configuration of the available hardware. The access code
can be purchased at any time from Comtech EF Data. Once obtained, the access code is
loaded into the unit through the front panel keyboard or the rear remote port.
With the exclusive FAST technology, operators have maximum flexibility for enabling
functions as they are required. FAST allows an operator to order a modulator precisely
tailored for the initial application, reducing risk and cost overruns during the application
integration process.
14-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
FAST Options
14.2
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
IMPLEMENTATION
FAST is factory-implemented in the modulator at the time of order. Hardware options for
basic modulators can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the field. The
operator can select options that can be activated easily in the field, depending on the
current hardware configuration of the modulator.
14.2.1
ACTIVATION PROCEDURE
Obtain Modulator serial number as follows:
Press [CLEAR] to return to the Main menu.
Use [←] and [→] to select Function Select menu.
Press [ENTER].
Use [←] and [→] to select Utility Modulator Type menu.
Press [ENTER].
Use [←] and [→] to select Modulator Serial # menu.
Record serial number: ________________________
Select desired features as follows:
Use [←] and [→] to select MOD Options menu.
Press [ENTER].
Scroll [→] and select MOD Options.
Press [ENTER].
Scroll through the MOD Options and check off all features that display a “+” sign as
follows:
16QAM
[ ]
8PSK
[ ]
OEM LCD
[ ]
Notes:
If the menu displays a “0”, the unit will need to be returned to the
manufacturer for the desired hardware upgrade.
If the unit displays an “X”, the unit can be upgraded in the field.
If the unit displays a “+”, the feature is installed.
If the unit displays a “-”, the feature is FAST accessible.
Press [CLEAR].
Contact Comtech EF Data Customer Support to order features.
14-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
FAST Options
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Comtech EF Data Customer Support personnel will verify the order and provide an
invoice and instructions.
Enter access codes as follows:
Press [CLEAR] to return to the Main menu.
Use [←] and [→] to select Function Select:Utility menu.
Press [ENTER].
Use [←] and [→] to select Utility:MOD Options menu.
Press [ENTER].
Use [←] and [→] to select Configuration Code-MOD menu
Press [ENTER].
Menu appears as follows:
AAAAAAAAAA
AAAAAAAAAA
Enter the access code. Observe the following:
1. To enter the code, press [ENTER] and use the [↑ ] [↓ ] keys to select an
alpha numeric character.
2. Use [→ ] to move to the next character or to move to the next line.
3. Repeat the procedure until all the required characters of the code have been
entered.
4. After completing entry of the code, press [ENTER]. The unit should display
Modem Initialization and will reboot to the factory default settings with
the new option available.
5. If a wrong or invalid code is entered, the unit will display Wrong Code
Entered! and no changes will occur. Retry the code, verify that the code is
correct, or request assistance from Comtech EF Data Customer Support
department.
14-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
FAST Options
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Entering Access Codes from the Remote Control Port, as follows:
1. Establish remote communication with the unit. Display will show REMOTE
MODE (if applicable).
2. Enter the following commands as needed to enable the option related to
each board:
Main Board
Overhead Board
MUX/DEMUX Board
TX Reed-Solomon
RX Reed Solomon
<x/CCMD_code
<x/CCOD_code
<x/CCMX_code
<x/CCTR_code
<x/CCRR_code
X = address
Code =20 digit configuration code
3. The modem should re-initialize and boot up to the factory default setting.
Note: If the unit is an SDR-54/54A, the power should be cycled to reinitialize the unit and enable the option(s).
Verify the upgrade, as follows:
1. Press [CLEAR] to return to the Main menu.
2. Use [ ← ] and [ → ] to select Function Select:Utility menu.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Use [ ← ] and [ → ] to select Utility:MOD Options menu.
5. Press [ENTER].
6. Use [ ← ] and [→ ] to scroll through the features. Visually check selected
features for a “+” sign. If a “+” sign is evident, the upgrade is completed.
If upgrade is incorrect, the menu display will exhibit, “WRONG CODE ENTERED!.”
Repeat procedures. If the error message remains, contact Comtech EF Data Customer
Support personnel for further instructions.
14-4
Appendix A. REMOTE CONTROL
OPERATION
This appendix describes the remote control operation of the SDM-2020 Modulator.
•
•
Firmware number: FW/5613-1AG
FW/5613-2AG
Software version: 9.1.2
Remote controls and status information are transferred via an EIA-485 (optional
EIA-232) serial communications link. Commands and data are transferred on the remote
control communications link as US ASCII-encoded character strings. The remote
communications link is operated in a half-duplex mode.
A remote controller or terminal initiates communications on the remote link. The modem
never transmits data on the link unless it is commanded to do so.
Some commands and status information are interface-type dependent.
A.1
MESSAGE STRUCTURE
The ASCII character format used requires 11 bits/character:
•
1 start bit
•
1 parity bit (Not applicable to 8 information bit setup)
•
2 stop bits
•
7 information bits or 8 information bits
Messages on the remote link fall into the categories of commands and responses.
Commands are messages, which are transmitted to a satellite modem, while responses are
messages returned by a satellite modem in response to a command.
A-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
The general message structure is as follows:
•
Start Character
•
Device Address
•
Command/Response
•
End of Message Character
‘add’
If a command is issued remotely with the intent to change a modulator configurable
parameter, the ‘REM_’ command must be issued first. This is to avoid data collision if
one was to be changing data from the front panel while another was sending a remote
command at the same time.
The first exception to the rule is if a command was issued to check a parameter status.
The ‘REM_’ command would not be required first and a status would be returned
normally.
The second exception to this rule is if the ‘MCP_’ command is issued for program
configuration changes or a status request. When this particular command is issued with a
command string attached, the Modulator will automatically engage remote mode,
followed by the execution of the ‘MCP_’ command. While this command is being
processed, any key presses from the front panel are stored in a keyboard buffer and
executed after the MCP command is completed.
A.1.1
START CHARACTER
A single character precedes all messages transmitted on the remote link. This
character flags the start of a message. This character is:
A.1.2
•
“<” for commands
•
“>” for responses
DEVICE ADDRESS
The device address is the address of the one satellite modulator which is
designated to receive a transmitted command, or which is responding to a
command.
Note: Address 0 is reserved as a global address which simultaneously addresses all
devices on a given communications link.
Valid device addresses are 1 to 3 characters long, and in the range of 1 to 255.
Devices do not acknowledge global commands.
Each satellite modulator, which is connected to a common remote
communications link, must be assigned its own unique address. Addresses are
software selectable at the modulator, and must be in the range of 1 to 255.
A-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.1.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
COMMAND/RESPONSE
The command/response portion of the message contains a variable-length character
sequence, which conveys command and response data.
If a satellite modulator receives a message addressed to it, which does not match the
established protocol or cannot be implemented, a negative acknowledgment message is
sent in response. These acknowledgment messages are:
>add/?ER1_PARITY
ERROR'cr''lf']
(Error message for received parity errors.)
>add/?ER2_INVALID
PARAMETER'cr''lf']
(Error message for a recognized command which cannot be
implemented or has parameters which are out of range.)
>add/?ER3_UNRECOGNIZABLE
COMMAND'cr''lf']
(Error message for unrecognizable command or bad
command syntax.)
>add/?ER4_MODEM IN LOCAL
MODE'cr''lf']
(Modem in local error; send the REM command to go to
remote mode.)
>add/?ER5_HARD CODED
PARAMETER'cr''lf']
(Error message indicating that the parameter is hardware
dependent and may not be changed remotely.)
Note: “add” is used to indicate a valid 1 to 3 character device address in the range
between 1 and 255.
A-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.1.4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
END CHARACTER
A single character signals the end of each message:
•
“cr”
Carriage return character for commands
•
“lf”
Line feed
•
“]”
End bracket for responses
A-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2
A.2.1
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Frequency
RF Output
(IF Output)
Modulator
Rate
Assignment
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION COMMANDS/RESPONSES
MODULATOR CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
>add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
RF_OFF'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MF_'cr'
>add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RF_xxx'cr'
>add/RF_xxx'cr'lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RF_'cr'
>add/RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/AMRV_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
>add/AMRV_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/AMRV_'cr'
>add/AMRV_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: nnn.nnnn = Frequency in MHz,
50.0000 to 180.0000 in 2.5 kHz steps.
Note: When the modulator frequency is
programmed, the RF output is switched
off.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where:
nnnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2) [Coder rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), 5/6 (QPSK
5/6), 2/3 (QPSK 2/3), 8P23 (8PSK 2/3),
8P56 (8PSK 5/6), 8P89 (8PSK 8/9),
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4), 16Q78 (16QAM
7/8).
mmm.mmmmmm = Data rate in MHz.
Note: When using a SMPTE 310M
interface, the data rate is fixed at
19.392658 MHz. While the code rate can
be changed as applicable, an invalid
parameter message will be generated if
any other data rate is input for change.
A-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Symbol Rate
Assignment
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ASR_nnnnn_mm.mmmmmm'cr'
>add/ASR_nnnnn_mm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASR_'cr'
>add/ASR_nnnnn_mm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
nnnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2) [Code rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), 5/6 (QPSK
5/6), 2/3 (QPSK 2/3), 8P23 (8PSK 2/3),
8P56 (8PSK 5/6), 8P89 (8PSK 8/9),
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4), 16Q78 (16QAM
7/8).
mm.mmmmmm = Symbol rate in MHz.
Note: When using a SMPTE 310M
interface, the data rate is fixed at
19.392658 MHz. While the code rate can
be changed as applicable, an invalid
parameter message will be generated if
any other data rate is input for change.
Set
Modulator
Output
Power Level
Command:
Response:
<add/MOP_snn.n'cr'
>add/MOP_snn.n'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MOP_'cr'
>add/MOP_snn.n'cr''lf']
Scrambler
Enable
Command:
Response:
<add/SE_xxx'cr'
>add/SE_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/SE_'cr'
>add/SE_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/MSR_xxx'cr'
>add/MSR_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MSR_'cr'
>add/MSR_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/COM_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/COM_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/COM_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/COM_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit IF
Output
Power-up
Condition
Command:
Response:
<add/TXPU_xxxx'cr'
>add/TXPU_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxx = LAST (last known state)
or OFF (OFF).
Status:
Response:
<add/TXPU_xxxx'cr'
>add/TXPU_xxxx'cr''lf']
This command selects the state that the
TX-IF Output will be at power up.
Set
Modulator
Power Offset
Command:
Response:
<add/MPO_snn.n'cr'
>add/MPO_snn.n'cr''lf']
Where: snn.n = +40.0 to -40.0 in 0.1 dB
increments.
Status:
Response:
<add/MPO_'cr'
>add/MPO_snn.n'cr''lf']
Note: The modulator power offset is
added to the nominal power level.
(Energy
Dispersal)
Modulator
Spectrum
Rotation
Carrier Only
Mode
A-6
Where: snn.n = -20.0 to +5.0 in 0.1 steps
(nominal range in dBm).
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxx = NRM (normal spectrum) or
INV (inverted spectrum).
Where: xxxxxx = OFF, DUAL, OFFSET,
or CENTER.
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Type
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/MT_xxxx'cr'
>add/MT_xxxx'cr'lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MT_xxxx'cr'
>add/MT_xxxx'cr'lf']
Comments
Where: xxxx = DVB1 or DVB2.
A.2.2 BULK MODULATOR CONFIGURATION
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Modulator
Config
Command
/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/BMC_p1,p2,p3,…..pn'cr'
>add/BCM_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf']
Comments
This command causes the modulator to be
programmed with supplied parameters. All
parameters are separated by a ',' except for
the last parameter which has the standard
command termination character ('cr').
Parameters that do not need to be changed
can be nulled (no data between commas).
Status:
Response:
<add/BMC_'cr'
<add/BMC_p1,p2,p3,…..pn'cr''lf']
Note: This is the only command that may
be issued without first invoking the remote
command ("<add/REM_"). The remote
command is part of the initialization of this
BMC_command. Status requests to not
require that the remote command be issued
at all.
Where'pn' is the last parameter returned.
A-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BMC
Parameters
1 to 33
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Description
1
Modulator Rate Assignment
(ref."AMRV_"command)
p1 = nnnnn-mmm.mmmmmm, code
rate/date rate in Mbps
2
Modulator IF Frequency
(ref. 'MF_' command).
p2 = nnn.nnnn, IF frequency in MHz
3
Modulator RF Output
(ref. 'RF_' command).
p3 = n, where n is 0 or 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On).
4
Modulator Output Power Level
(ref. 'MOP_' command).
p4 = snn.n, transmitter output power level in
dBm.
5
Modulator Power Offset
(ref. 'MPO_' command).
p5 = snn.n, transmitter power offset level in
dBm.
6
Carrier Only Mode
(ref. 'COM_' command).
p6 = n, where n is 0, 1, 2, 3
(0 = Off, 1 = Dual, 2 = Offset, 3 = Center)
7
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
(ref. 'MSR_' command).
p7 = n, where n is 0 or 1
(0 = NRM, 1 =INV)
8
TX Output Power-up Configuration
(ref. 'TXPU_' command).
p8 = n, where 'n' is '0' or ‘1’
(0 = Off, 1 = Last)
9
Modulator Type
(ref. 'MT_' command).
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
p9 = n, where 'n' is '0' or ‘1’
(0 = DVB-1, 1 = DVB-2)
Scrambler Enable
(ref. 'SE_' command).
p10 = n, where 'n' is ’0’ or ‘1’
(0 = Off , 1 = On)
Transit Clock Phase
(ref. 'TCP_' command).
p11 = n, where 'n' = ‘0’ or ‘1’
(0 = NRM, 1 = INV)
Transmit Data Phase
(ref. 'TDP_' command).
p12 = n, where 'n' = ‘0’ or ‘1’
(0 = NRM, 1 = INV)
Transmit 2047 pattern generator
(ref. 'ISP_' command).
Transmit Sync Select
(ref. 'SYNC_' command).
p14 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’
(0 = EXT, 1 = Data, 2 = Auto)
Transit Data Fault Mode
(ref. ‘ TDF_’command)
p15 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’
(0 = None, 1 = Data Stable, 2 = AIS)
Transmit Clock Activity Action
(ref. 'TCAA_' command).
DVB Framing Type
(ref. 'TDVB_' command).
18 through
22
Reserved
23 through
40
Interface Specific
p13 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’ or ‘1’
(0 = Off, 1 = On)
p16 = n, where 'n' is '0' or ‘1’
(0 = Fault, 1 = Alarm)
p17 = n, where n = '1' , ‘2’, ‘3’
(1 = 188, 2 = None, 3 = 204)
A-8
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.1
Parameter
Type
BMC
Parameters
23 to 40
RS-422 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
24
25
26
27
A.2.2.2
Parameter
Type
BMC
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
Interface Select Mode
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (DVB, 1 =530)
Interface Clock Mode
(ref. ‘ICLK_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Serial), '1' (Parallel).
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
CTS State Control
(ref ‘CTSS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
28
DM State Control
(ref. ‘DM_’command).
29 thru 40
Reserved
P28 = n, where n = ‘0’(Normal), ‘1’ (Invert)
LVDS INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
24 thru 40
Description of Arguments
Interface Clock Mode
(ref. ‘ICLK_' command).
Reserved
A-9
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (Serial), '1' (Parallel).
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.3
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI/RS-422 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
Interface Select Mode
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (RS422).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
CTS State Control
(ref 'CTSS_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
27
DM State Control
(ref 'DMS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
28
ST State Control
(ref 'ST_' command).
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
29
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p29 = n, where n = 'A' (A-Input), 'B' (B-Input).
30
ASI Loop Bandwith Control
(ref ‘ASLB_’command).
p30 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
31
Interface Loopback
(ref. ‘ILB_”command).
p31 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Off), ‘1’ (On).
32
Interface Loop Thru Control
(ref. ‘ILM_”command).
p32 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Off), ‘1’ (On).
33 to 40
Reserved
A-10
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.4
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
A.2.2.5
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI/LVDS INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
Interface Select Mode
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (LVDS).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (A-Input), '1' (B-Input).
27
ASI Loop Bandwidth Control
(ref 'ASLB_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
28
Interface Loopback
(ref ‘ILB_’command).
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
29
Interface Loop Thru Control
(ref ‘ILM_’command)
P29 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
30
ASI Link Mode Control
(ref ‘ASIA_’command)
P30 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Manual), ‘1’ (Auto)
31 and 40
Reserved.
SMPTE-310 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_’command)
Comments
p23 = n, where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON)
24
Interface Loopback
(ref ‘RTSS_’command)
p24 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Normal) or ‘1’ (Invert).
25
Interface Loopback
(ref: 'ILB_' command).
p25 = n, where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON).
26
RTS State Control
(ref “ILM_”command)
P26 = n where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON)
27 to 40
Reserved.
A-11
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.6
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
G.703 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
24
25
26
A.2.2.7
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
TX Interface Coding Format
(ref ‘ICFT_’command)
Comments
p23 = n, where n = ‘0’ (AMI), ‘1’ (B3ZS), ‘2’ (HDB3),
‘3’ (B8ZS).
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_’command)
p24 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Off) or ‘1’ (On).
RTS State Control
(ref: 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Normal) or ‘1’ (Invert).
Interface Loopback
(ref “ILB_”command)
p26 = n where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON).
27
Interface Loop Thru Control
(ref ‘ILM_’command)
28 to 40
Reserved
p27 = n where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON).
ECL/HSSI INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
DTE TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'DTEM_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
24
DTE State Control
(ref “DTES_”command).
P24 = n, where n ='0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
25
DCE State Control
(ref “DCES_”command).
P25 = n, where n = '0' (zNormal), '1' (Invert).
26 to 40
Reserved.
A.2.3 BULK MODULATOR CONFIGURATION CHANGE STATUS
Parameter
Type
Bulk Modulator
Config
Change Status
Command/Status/
Response
Status:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/BMCS_'cr'
>add/BMCS_x'cr''lf']
Comments
The ‘x’ character is defined as follows:
‘@’ = No change since last BMC_ poll.
‘A’ = BMC_ response has changed since last
BMC_ poll.
This command indicates that a change has or has
not occurred on the BMC_ response since the last
BMC_poll.
A-12
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.4
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Modulator
Config
Errors
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
BULK MODULATOR CONFIGURATION ERRORS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/BMCE_'cr'
>add/BCM_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn40'cr''lf']
Comments
When the BCME_command is executed, the
host M&C will inspect all of the supplied
parameters of the Bulk Modulator Command
(BMC_) for failure. If any particular parameter
or any combination of parameters is invalid or
out of range, the resulting output error listing
will allow the user to evaluate which
parameters caused the error.
The output error listing is a series of 40
characters, which are either a 1 or a 0,
commas delimited. A listing of all 0 would
indicate that there were no errors. A 1 in
position 1 and position 17 might indicate that
the symbol range of the modulator was
exceeded (Data and Code Rate are
programmed in position 1 and framing type
which affects symbol rate would be position
17).
This command is a status request only, and is
cleared after another BMC_ command is
issued. The BMCE_command will alaways
report the status of all 40 parameters,
whether these parameters are used or
reserved.
Note: Parameters 23 through 40 are interface
dependent. Ensure to refer to the
BMC_command for the particular type of
interface that is installed in the modulator.
Where'pn40' is the last parameter returned.
A-13
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
A.2.5 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/TCP_xxx'cr'
>add/TCP_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TCP_'cr'
>add/TCP_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/TDP_xxx'cr'
>add/TDP_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TDP_'cr'
>add/TDP_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ISP_xxx'cr'
>add/ISP_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ISP_'cr'
>add/ISP_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/SYNC_xxxx'cr'
>add/SYNC_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxx = EXT (sync pulse), DATA (data
sync byte), AUTO.
Status:
Response:
<add/SYNC_'cr'
>add/SYNC_xxxx'cr''lf']
Note: Data is only allowed with the ASI/LVDS
interface operating in ASI mode.
Command:
Response:
<add/TDF_xxxx'cr'
>add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxx = NONE, DATA, AIS.
Status:
Response:
<add/TDF_'cr'
>add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/TDVB_xxxx'cr'
>add/TDVB_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TDVB_'cr'
>add/TDVB_xxxx'cr''lf']
Interface
Identification
Status:
Response:
<add/INID_'cr'
>add/INID_xxxxxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxxxxxxx = RS422, LVDS,
ASI_RS422, ECL_TX, G.703, SMPTE 310M,
ASI/LVDS, or UNKNOWN.
Interface Mode
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/ICLK_xxx'cr'
>add/ICLK_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = SER (Serial mode, CLK = Data
rate) or PAR (Parallel mode CLK = Data
rate/8).
Status:
Response:
<add/ICLK_'cr'
>add/ICLK_xxx'cr''lf']
Parameter Type
Transmit Clock
Phase
Transmit Data
Phase
Interface
Substitution
Pattern
DVB Sync
Selection
Transmit Data
Fault
DVB Framing
Type
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (normal clock phasing) or
INV (inverted clock phasing).
Where: xxx = NRM (normal data phasing) or
INV (inverted data phasing).
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Note: Transmit 2047 Pattern.
A-14
Where: xxxx = 188, 204, NONE.
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter Type
TX Clock Activity
Action
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
>add/TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TCAA_'cr'
>add/TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxxxx = ALARM or FAULT.
A.2.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
Time Of Day
Date
Remote
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr'
>add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TIME_'cr'
>add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr'
>add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/DATE_'cr'
>add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/REM_'cr'
>add/REM_'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
hh = 1 to 12 (hours).
mm = 00 to 59 (minutes).
xx = AM or PM.
Where:
mm = 1 to 12 (month).
dd = 1 to 31 (day).
yy = 00 to 99 (year) in 2-digit year mode.
yyyy = 1975 to 1999, and 2000 to 2075 in 4digit mode.
Configures the Modem for remote operation.
The modulator will respond to any status
request at any time. However, the modulator
must be in 'Remote Mode' to change
configuration parameters.
Clear Stored
Faults
Command:
Response:
<add/CLSF_'cr'
>add/CLSF_'cr''lf']
This command is used to clear all stored faults
logged by the modulator.
Save Mod
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/SMC_nn'cr'
>add/SMC_nn'cr''lf']
Where: n = 1, 2, 3, ..., 10 (stored configuration
number).
This command saves the current mod
configuration for recall at a later time using the
'RMC_' command. Up to ten different mod
configurations can be saved.
Recall Mod
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/RMC_nn'cr'
>add/RMC_nn'cr''lf']
Where: n = 1, 2, 3, ..., 10 (stored configuration
number).
This command causes the mod to be
reprogrammed with configuration parameters
previously saved using the 'SMC_' command.
One of 10 saved configurations can be
specified.
A-15
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Alarm Relay
State
A.3
A.3.1
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Rate
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ARLY_xxx'cr'
>add/ARLY_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV
(inverted sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/ARLY_'cr'
>add/ARLY_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the
Mod alarm relay (NC and NO contacts).
STATUS COMMANDS/RESPONSES
CONFIGURATION STATUS
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/MR_'cr'
>add/MR_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
nnnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2) [Coder rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4)
7/8 (QPSK 7/8), 5/6 (QPSK 5/6), 2/3 (QPSK
2/3), 8P23 (8PSK 2/3), 8P56 (8PSK 5/6),
8P89 (8PSK 8/9), 16Q34 (16QAM 3/4), 16Q78
(16QAM 7/8).
mmm.mmmmmm = Data rate in MHz.
Note: When using a SMPTE 310M interface,
the data rate is fixed at 19.392658 MHz. While
the code rate can be changed as applicable,
an invalid parameter message will be
generated if any other data rate is input for
change.
A-16
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Config.
Status
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MCS_'cr'
>add/MCS_'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
AMRA_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
AMRV_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
RF Output (ON/OFF)
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Rate
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Carrier Only Mode
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
The Modulator configuration status command
causes a block of data to be returned by the
addressed mod. The block of data reflects the
current configuration status of the modulator
module. Additional configuration status of new
options and features will always be appended
to the end.
Modulator/
Coder
Config.
Program
Status
Interface
Config.
Status
Modem
Faults
Status
(Summary)
Modulator
Status
Note: This command is used by Comtech EFData M:N protection switch to collect information that is necessary
to configure back-up modulators. Because this command (content and/or order) can be changed at any time by
Comtech EFData, it is advisable that other commands (“MCS_”, “ICS_”, or “BCS_”) be used for M&C systems.
This command varies depending on the installed interface. The command is located in the interface sections.
Note: The interface configuration status command causes a block of data to be returned by the addressed
MODEM. The block reflects the current configuration of the interface. Additional configuration status of new
options and features will always be appended to the end. This command varies depending on the installed
interface. This command is located in the interface sections.
Command:
<add/MFS_'cr'
Response:
>add/MFS_'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
Modulator (FLT/OK)
ITX_xxx'cr'
Interface Transmit Side (FLT/OK)
CEQ_xxx'cr''lf']
Common Equipment (FLT/OK)
Command:
Response:
<add/MS_'cr'
>add/MS_'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
DCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
AGC_xxx'cr'
IF_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
RF Output (ON/OFF) Actual status not config.
Module (OK/FLT)
IF Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
Data Clock Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
I Channel (OK/FLT)
Q Channel (OK/FLT)
AGC Level (OK/FLT)
IF Module Fault (OK/FLT)
Configuration Fault (OK/FLT)
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
A-17
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Interface
Status
A.4
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/ITXS_'cr'
>add/ITXS_'cr'
FSYN_xxx'cr'
TXD_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
FIFO_xxx'cr'
INT_xxx'cr'
DF_xxx'cr'
VSYN_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
Comments
Frame Sync Lock (OK/FLT)
Transmit Data (OK/FLT)
Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
Transmit Clock Activity (OK/FL)
Transmit FIFO (OK/FLT)
Interface Module (OK/FLT)
Data Format (OK/FLT)
Video Frame Sync (OK/FLT)
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
COMMON EQUIPMENT STATUS
This common equipment status command causes a block of data to be returned which
indicates the status of the common equipment .
Parameter Type
Common Equipment
Status
A.5
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/CES_’’ cr’
>add/CES_’cr’
M&C_xxx'cr'
BAT_xxx'cr'
+5_xxx'cr'
+12_xxx'cr'
-12_xxx'cr'
MODE_xxxxxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr'’If”]
Comments
Monitor & Control Module (OK/FLT)
Battery/Clock (OK/FLT)
+5 volt power supply (OK/FLT)
+12 volt power supply (OK/FLT)
-12 volt power supply (OK/FLT)
Mode (LOCAL or REMMOTE)
Number of stored faults logged (0 to 10)
STORED FAULTS STATUS
Information on stored faults is returned when requested. If no stored fault exists for a
given fault number, the words “NO Fault” will be returned instead of the normal
time/date status information. The following symbols are commonly used to define the
stored faults status commands:
#
hh
mm
ss
MM
DD
YY or YYYY
Fault number (0 to 9). “0” is the first fault stored.
Hours in 24-hr. format.
Minutes.
Seconds.
Month.
Day.
Year (2- or 4-digits)
A-18
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter Type
Modulator Stored Faults
Interface Transmit Side
Stored Faults
Common Equipment
Stored Faults
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MSF_#'cr'
>add/MSF_# hh:mm:ss
MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
DCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
AGC_xxx'cr'
IF_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ITSF_#'cr'
>add/ITSF_# hh:mm:ss
MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
FSYN_xxx'cr'
TXD_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
FIFO_xxx'cr'
INT_xxx'cr'
DF_xxx'cr''lf']
VSYN_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/CSF_#'cr'
>add/CSF_# hh:mm:ss
MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
M&C_xxx'cr'
BAT_xxx'cr'
+5_xxx'cr'
+12_xxx'cr'
-12_xxx'cr''lf']
A-19
Comments
Module (OK/FLT)
IF Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
Data Clock Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
I Channel (OK/FLT)
Q Channel (OK/FLT)
AGC Level (OK/FLT)
IF Module Fault (OK/FLT)
Configuration (OK/FLT)
Frame Sync Lock (OK/FLT)
Transmit Data (OK/FLT)
Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock
(OK/FLT)
Transmit Clock Activity (OK/FL)
Transmit FIFO (OK/FLT)
Interface Module (OK/FLT)
Data Format (OK/FLT)
Video Sync (OK/FLT)
Monitor & Control Module (OK/FLT)
Battery/Clock (OK/FLT)
+5V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
+12V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
-12V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
A.5.1 BULK CONSOLIDATED STATUS
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Consol.
Status
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
Comments
<add/BCS_'cr'
>add/BCS_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf']
This command causes bulk mod status to
be returned. To reduce the length of the
response, message parameter data are
returned without identifiers. However,
parameter identification can be determined
by order of return. Each status parameter is
terminated with a ',' (comma) except for the
last parameter which has the standard
message termination sequence ('cr''lf']).
Most of the data returned is formatted the
same way as the single command status
request (refer to the appropriate portions of
this document in preceding sections).
Additional configuration status of new
options and features will always be
appended to the end.
A-20
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
1 to 33
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter
Number
1
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Modem Remote/Local mode
2
Modulator RF Output
(ref. 'RF_' command).
p2 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Off) or '1' (On).
3
Modulator IF Frequency
(ref. 'MF_' command).
p3 = nnn.nnnn, IF frequency in MHz.
4
Modulator Rate
(ref. 'MR_' command).
p4 = nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm, code rate/data rate in
Mbps.
5
Modulator Rate
(ref. 'ASR_' command).
p5 = nnnn_mm.mmmmmm, code rate/symbol rate in
Msps.
6
Modulator Power Offset
(ref. 'MPO_' command).
p6 = snn.n, transmitter power offset level in dBm.
7
Modulator Output Power Level
(ref. 'MOP_' command).
p7 = snn.n, transmitter output power in dBm.
8
Scrambler Enable
(ref. 'SE_' command).
p8 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
9
TX Output Power-up Configuration
(ref. 'TXPU_' command).
p9 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (last).
10
Carrier Only Mode
(ref. 'COM_' command).
11
12
13
14
Description
p1 = n, where 'n' is '0' (LOCAL) or '1' (REMOTE).
p10 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Off), '1' (Dual),' 2' (Offset),
or '3' (Center).
Modulator Type
(ref. 'MT_' command).
p11 = n, where 'n' = '0' (DVB-1) or '1' (DVB-2).
Transmit Clock Phase
(ref. 'TCP_' command).
p12 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV), or '2'.
Transmit Data Phase
(ref. 'TDP_' command).
p13 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
Transmit Data Phase
(ref. 'TDF_' command).
p14 = n, where 'n' is '0' (None), '1' (Data stable), or
'2' (AIS).
15
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
(ref. 'ISP_' command).
p15 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
16
Transmit Clock Phase
(ref. 'SYNC_' command).
p16 = n, where 'n' is '0' (EXT), '1' (DATA), or '2'
(AUTO).
17
DVB Framing Type
(ref. 'TDVB_' command).
p17 = n, where n = '1' (188), '2' (NONE), or '3' (204).
18
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
(ref. 'MSR_' command).
p18 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
A-21
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Number
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Description
19 and 20
Reserved.
21
Interface ID
(ref. 'INID_' command).
p21 = 'xxxxxxx', where xxxxxxx = Interface type.
22
Interface clock Mode
(ref. 'ICLK_' command).
p22 = n, where n = '0' (Serial) or '1' (Parallel).
23 to 32
Interface specific.
33
TX Clock Activity Action
(ref. 'TCAA' command).
p33 = n, where n = '0' (Fault), '1' (Alarm).
A.5.2 BULK CONSOLIDATED STATUS FAULTS
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Consol.
Status
Faults
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/BCSF_'cr'
>add/BCSF_abcdefghijklmnop'cr''lf']
Comments
This command causes all mod fault status to be
returned. To reduce the length of the response,
fault status is embedded into the bit structure of
the characters that are returned. Faults are
indicated by a binary 1 in the designated bit
position. Additional fault status of new options
and features will be appended to the end or use
existing reserved bits.
Character 'a': Modulator fault status character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Modulator module fault.
Bit 4 = RF output status, actual not
programmed status (1 = on, 0 = off).
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation
(0 to 10) of the number of modulator
stored faults.
Character 'b': Modulator fault status character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF Synthesizer.
Bit 4 = Data Clock Synthesizer.
Bit 3 = I Channel.
Bit 2 = Q Channel.
Bit 1 = AGC Level.
Bit 0 = Configuration.
Character 'c': Modulator fault status character 3.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF module.
Bit 4 through Bit 0 reserved.
A-22
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Command/
Status/
Response
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
Comments
Character 'd': Interface transmit side faults
character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Data Format Fault
Bit 4 = reserved.
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation
(0 to 10) of the number of interface
transmit side stored faults.
Character 'e': Interface transmit side faults
character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Frame Sync Lock.
Bit 4 = Transmit Data Valid.
Bit 3 = Transmit Clock Activity.
Bit 2 = Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock.
Bit 1 = Transmit FIFO.
Bit 0 = Interface module fault
Character 'f': Interface transmit side faults
character 3.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 through Bit 0 reserved.
Character 'g': Common equipment fault status
character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = reserved.
Bit 4 through Bit 0 = Binary representation
(0 to 10) of the number of common
equipment stored faults.
Character 'h': Common equipment fault status
character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Battery/Clock.
Bit 4 = +5V power supply.
Bit 3 = +12V power supply.
Bit 2 = -12V power supply.
Bit 1 = Monitor & Control Module.
Bit 0 = reserved.
A-23
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.5.3
Parameter
Type
Change
Status
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CHANGE STATUS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/CS_'cr'
>add/CS_x'cr''lf']
Comments
Where 'x' =
'@' = NO change since last BCS_ and BCSF_ polls.
'A' = BCS_ response has changed since last BCS_ poll.
'B' = BCSF_ response has changed since last BCSF_ poll.
'C' = Both responses have changed since last BCS_ and
BCSF_ polls.
This command indicates that a change has or has not occurred
on either the BCS_ or the BCSF_ response since the last
BCS_ or BCSF_ poll.
A.5.4
Parameter
Type
Equipment Type
UTILITY SYSTEM STATUS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ET_'cr'
>add/ET_tttttttt_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
tttttttt = Equipment type.
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version.
This command returns the equipment type
and the software version of the addressed
device.
Monitor & Control
Firmware
Information
Command:
Response:
<add/MCFI_'cr'
>add/MCFI_'cr'
VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddrr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number
(0.0.0 to 999.999.999).
nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
A-24
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Boot Firmware
Information
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/BFI_'cr'
>add/BFI_'cr'
Ver:_xxx_yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddrr’cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number
(0.0.0 to 999.999.999).
nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Encoder Firmware
Information (EFI)
Command:
Response:
<add/EFI_'cr'
>add/EFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-ddrr'cr'
Mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Reed-Solomon
Firmware
Information
(RSFI)
Command:
Response:
<add/RSFI_'cr'
>add/RSFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-ddrr'cr'
Mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Interface Firmware
Information
(As Required)
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-ddrr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
dd= Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Modem Options/
Misc. Information
Command:
Response:
<add/MOI_'cr'
>add/MOI_'cr'
s,OEM_LCD'cr'
s,16QAM'cr'
s,8PSK'cr''lf']
Where:
s = 0 (Not Installed, Not Upgradable)
- = (Not Installed, FAST Upgradable)
+ = (Installed)
(- or +) OEM LCD option
(- or +) 16QAM Code Rate option
(- or +) 8PSK Code Rate option
State of Product
Command:
Response:
<add/SOP_’cr’
>add/SOP_’cr’
Product address: abc’cr’
Baud format: abc’cr’
Baud rate: rrrrr bps’cr’
Comm type: <var-string1>’cr’
<varstring2>’cr’’lf’]
A-25
Where: a = Number of data bits (7)
b = Parity type (O,E,N)
c = Number of stop bits (1)
rrrrr = baud rate (150, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14.4K,
19.2K)
<var_string1> = Variable length
strings explaining communication
hardware type:
RS-485, 2 wire
RS-485, 4 wire
RS-232
<var_string2> = Variable length
strings explaining the intention of
the product:
“Under normal system operation”
“REFLASH of BULK firmware
required”
“REFLASH of M&C firmware
required”
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.6
Parameter
Type
Interface
Select
Command
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
RS-422 INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description
of Arguments
<add/ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ISEL_'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
This command is used for multiple interfaces:
Where: Interface RS-422
xxxxxx = DVB or 530
Interface ASI/RS-422 xxxxxx = DVB or RS422
Interfae ASI/LVDS xxxxxx = DVB or
LVDS
This command selects which interface connector will
be used for data.
RTS TX-IF
Control
Mode
RTS State
Control
CTS State
DM State
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/CTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/CTSS_'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/DMS_xxx'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/DMS_'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
Where xxx = On or Off.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If ON is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned On if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults are
present). If OFF is selected, the TX-IF output will
operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where xxx = NRM (Normal) or INV (Invert).
This command controls the logic sense of the RTS
signal.
Where xxx = NRM (Normal) or INV (Invert).
This command control the logic sense of the CTS
signal.
Where xxx = NRM (Normal) or INV (Invert).
This command controls the logic sense of the DM
(DCS-ready) signal.
A-26
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Config.
ICS
Command
Config.
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description
of Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
CTSS_xxx'cr'
DMS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
CTSS_xxx'cr'
DMS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Interface Select
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DMS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Select
Interface Mode
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DM State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
A-27
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
Interface Select
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (DVB, 1 =530)
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
CTS State Control
(ref ‘CTSS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
27
DM State Control
(ref. ‘DM_’command).
28 thru 40
Reserved
P28 = n, where n = ‘0’(Normal), ‘1’ (Invert)
A.7
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Config.
LVDS INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
A-28
Comments
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
ICS
Command
Config.
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
A.8
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
23
thru
32
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of
Arguments
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
ASI/RS-422 INTERFACE COMMANDS
Description of Arguments
<add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ISEL_'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ASI_x'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASI_'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
ASI Loop
Bandwith
Select
Command
Command:
Response:
<add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/ASI_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASLB_'cr'
>add/ASI_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
RTS TX-IF
Control Mode
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
ASI Link
(Input) Select
Command
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Mode
TX Clock Activity Action
Reserved.
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Parameter
Type
Interface
Select
Command
Comments
Comments
Where: xxxxx = ASI or RS422.
This command selects which interface connector
will be used for data.
Where: x = 'A' (For A-Input) or 'B' (For B-Input).
Where xxxxxx = WIDE or NARROW
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults are
present). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output will
operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
A-29
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
RTS State
Control
CTS State
Control
DM State
Control
ST State
Control
Interface
Firmware
Information
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the RTS
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/CTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/CTSS_'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the CTS
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/DMS_xxx'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/DMS_'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the DM
(DCE-ready) signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/ST_xxx'cr'
>add/ST_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/ST_'cr'
>add/ST_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the ST
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr'cr'
Mm/dd/yyyy'cr''If']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
d = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A through ZZ).
A-30
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Config.
ICS
Command
Config.
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxxx'cr'
RTSS_xxxx'cr'
CTSS_xxxx'cr'
DMS_xxxx'cr'
ST_xxxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’’lf’]
Interface Select
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DM State Control
ST State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
ASI Loop BW (Wide/Narrow)
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
CTSS_xxx'cr'
DMS_xxx'cr'
ST_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr’
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’’lf’]
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Select
Interface Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DM State Control
ST State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
ASI Loop Bandwidth
A-31
Comments
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Interface Select
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
CTS State Control
(ref 'CTSS_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
27
DM State Control
(ref 'DMS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
28
ST State Control
(ref 'ST_' command).
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
29
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p29 = n, where n = 'A' (A-Input), 'B' (B-Input).
30
ASI Loop Bandwith Control
(ref ‘ASLB_’command)
p30 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
31-32
Reserved
Description
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (RS422).
A.9 ECL/HSSI TX INTERFACE COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
DTE TX-IF
Control
Mode
DTE Status
Command
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/DTEM_xxx'cr'
>add/DTEM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/DTEM_'cr'
>add/DTEM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/EDTE_'cr'
>add/EDTE_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the DTE
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming DTE
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults are
present). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output will
operate normal ignoring the DTE signal.
Where: xxx = AVA (available) or UNA (unavailable).
A-32
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/DTES_xxx'cr'
>add/DTES_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (Normal Sense) or INV (Inverted
Sense)
Status:
Response:
<add/DTES_'cr'
>add/DTES_xxx'cr''lf']
This commands control the logic sense og the DTE
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/DCES_xxx'cr'
>add/DCES_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (Normal Sense) or INV (Inverted
Sense)
Status:
Response:
<add/DCES_'cr'
>add/DCES_xxx'cr''lf']
This commands control the logic sense og the DCE
signal.
MCP
Command
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
DTEM_xxxx’cr’
TCAA_xxxxx’cr’
RF_xxx’cr’’If’]
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
DTE Mode Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF output (ON/OFF)
ICS
Command
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
DTEM_xxx’cr’
TCAA_xxxxx’cr’
DTES_xxx’cr’
DCES_xxx’cr’’If’]
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
DTE Mode Control
TX Clock Activity Action
DTE State Control
DCE State Control
Parameter
Type
DTE State
Control
DCE State
Control
A-33
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
DTE TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'DTEM_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
24
DTE State Control
(ref “DTES_”command).
P24 = n, where n ='0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
DCE State Control
(ref “DCES_”command).
P25 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
26-32
Reserved.
A.10
G.703 COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
Interface
Loop-back
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ILB_xxx'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILB_'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ILM_xxx'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILM_'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ICFT_xxxx'cr'
>add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ICFT_'cr'
>add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Loop
Thru Mode
Interface
Coding Format
Transmit
RTS TX-IF
Control Mode
RTS State
Control
Comments
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxxx = AMI, HDB3, B8ZS, or B3ZS.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults
are preset). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output
will operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command controls the logic of the RTS
signal.
A-34
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Interface
Firmware
Information
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
MCP
Command
Configuration
Command:
Response:
ICS Command
Configuration
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_xxx'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf'']
Comments
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
d = firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr''
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-Thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
A-35
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Para
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
TX Interface Coding Format
(ref: 'ICFT_' commands).
24
Interface Loopback
(ref: 'ILB_' command).
p24 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
25
Interface Loop Thru
(ref: 'ILM_' command).
p25 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
26 thru 32
Reserved.
Description
p23 = n, where n is 0 (AMI), 1, (B3ZS), 2 (HDB3), or 3
(B8ZS).
A.11
SMPTE 310M COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
Interface
Loop-back
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ILB_xxx'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILB_'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ILM_xxx'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILM_'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_xxx'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf'']
Interface Loop
Thru Mode
RTS TX-IF
Control Mode
RTS State
Control
Interface
Firmware
Information
Comments
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults
are preset). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output
will operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command controls the logic of the RTS
signal.
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
d = firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
A-36
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Configuration
ICS Command
Configuration
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr''
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-Thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
A-37
Comments
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
A.12
Parameter
Type
Interface
Loopback
Interface
Loop-Thru
Mode
Interface
Select
Command
ASI Link
(Input)
Select
Command
ASI Link
Mode
Select
Command
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Para
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Interface Loopback
Description
p23 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON)
24
Interface Loopback
p24 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
25
RX TX-IF Control Mode
(ref: 'RTSM_' command).
p25 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
26
RTS State Control
(ref “RTSS_”command)
P26 = n where n = 0 (Normal) or 1 (Invert)
27 to 32
Reserved.
ASI/LVDS INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ILB_xxx'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/ILB_'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ILM_xxx'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILM_'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Where xxxxx = ASI or LVDS
Status:
Response:
<add/ISEL_'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
This command selects which interface connector
will be used for data.
Command:
Response:
<add/ASI_x'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
Where: x= A-Input or B-Input
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/ASI_'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
<add/ASLA_xxxx’cr'
>add/ASLA_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASLA_'cr'
>add/ASLA_xxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: x = On or Off.
Where: xxxx = ‘MAN” (For Manual Input Select) or
‘Auto’ (For Auto Input Select)
A-38
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI Loop
Bandwidth
Select
Command
Command:
Response:
<add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASLB_'cr'
>add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
RTS TX-IF
Control
Mode
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If ‘ON’ is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be tuned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed On and No Major modulator faults
are presented. If ‘Off” is s elected, the TX-IF output
will operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where: xxx = NRM (normal Sense) ot INV
(inverted Sense)
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the RTS
signal.
Interface
Firmware
Information
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr’cr’
mm/dd/yyyy’cr’’lf’]
Where: nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535)
d = Firmware dash number (0 to 99)
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ)
IJ1
Interface
Jumper #1
Setting
MCP
Command
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/IJ1_'cr'
>add/IJ1_xx'cr'’lf’]
Where xx = TX or RX (LVDS)
Command:
Response:
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxxx'cr'
RTSS_xxxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’
ASIA_xxxx’cr’’lf]
RTS State
Control
Where: xxxxxx = Wide or Narrow.
Where: xxx = On or Off.
A-39
Interface Select
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
ASI Loop BW (Wide/Narrow)
ASI Link Mode (MAN/AUTO)
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
ICS
Command
Config.
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr’
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’
IJ1_xx’cr’
ASIA_xxxx’’lf’]
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Select
Interface Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
ASI Loop Bandwidth
Interface Jumper Position #1
ASI Link Mode (MAN/AUTO)
Para
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Interface Select
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (A-Input), '1' (B-Input).
27
ASI Loop Bandwidth Control
(ref 'ASLB_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
28
Interface Loopback
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
29
Interface Loop Thru
p29 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
30
Interface Jumper #1
p30 = n, where n = ‘0’ RX LVDS), ‘1’ (TX LVDS )
31
ASI Link Mode
(ref ‘ASIA_’command)
p31 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Manual), ‘1’ (Auto)
32
Reserved.
A-40
Description
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (LVDS).
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
A.13 ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY OPTION
The OEM LCD option permits the user to specify three pieces of information in the
equipment.
Lines 1 and 2 of the LCD display.
The identification of the unit when the remote port is interrogated for “equipment
type.”
If the manufacturer is to program this data into the equipment prior to delivery, the user
must specify the three strings. The manufacturer requires the string information ( as
specified in Column 4). The instructions for programming of the data via the equipment's
remote port is as follows:
Command/
Response
Command:
Response:
Remote Specification
<add/OES1_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr'
>add/OES1_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Status:
Response:
<add/OES1_'cr'
>add/OES1_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Program
OEM
String 2
(Notes 1
and 2)
Command:
Response:
<add/OES2_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr'
>add/OES2_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Status:
Response:
<add/OES2_'cr'
>add/OES2_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Program
OEM
String 3
Command:
Response:
<add/OES3_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr'
>add/OES3_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/OES3_'cr'
>add/OES3_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Parameter
Program
OEM
String 1
(Note 1)
(Note 3)
String Information
Where : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx =
16-character string to be displayed
on Line 1 of the modem LCD.
Where : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx =
16-character string to be displayed
on Line 2 of the modem LCD.
Where :
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
= 32-character string returned
when the ET_ (equipment type)
command is executed via the
remote port.
Notes:
1. A space in the display is created by the exponent character (^) in the string.
2. If a single question mark (?) is used as the OEM string 2, then the current version of the
M&C firmware is displayed. This is the usual entry.
3. Spaces are not allowed in OEM string 3. Use an underscore ( _ ) as a separator between
characters, see example:
Incorrect:
xxxx yyyy
Correct: xxxx_yyyy
4. FAST Upgrade Required
5. The <add/REM_ command shall be issued.
A-41
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
A-42
Errata A
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to Table 2-1. General Specification
Date:
Document:
July 9, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020.EA7
Attach this page to page 2-1
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for Table 2-1. This information will be
incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
Table 2-1. General Specifications
Parameter
Spectral Shaping
Specification
DVB-1, square-root raised cosine, α = 0.35 per EN 300 421
and prEN 301 210
DVB-2, narrower than DVB-1. Substantically meets DVB
25% rolloff but not fully compliant.
99% BW, 99% of the transmitted energy is contained within
a bandwidth ≤ 1.2 x (Symbol Rate).
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata a.doc
1
Errata D
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to BMC Remote Commands
Date:
Document:
July 9, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020.ED7
Attach this page to page A-8
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for BMC Parameters. This information will
be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
BMC Parameters
1 to 33
Parameter
Number
9
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Modulator Type
(ref. ‘MT_’command)
Description
p9 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, or ‘2’
(0=DVB-1, 1=DVB-2, or 2=DVB-99)
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata d.doc
1
Errata C
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to 5.6.7.4 Utility: Modulator: Modulator Type
Date:
Document:
July 9, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020.EC7
Attach this page to page 5-26
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for Paragraph 5.6.7.4. This information will
be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
5.6.7.4. UTILITY: MODULATOR: MODULATOR TYPE
MODULATOR TYPE
DVB-1
Use this menu to select a spectral mask type of DVB-1, DVB-2, or DVB-99:
DVB-1
DVB-2
99% BW
This is the default mask and is the “Best Fit” to the ETS 300 421 mask.
This mask has a sharper cutoff in the transition region from 3 to 40 dB
resulting in a narrower spectral, than DVB-1, at the 35 dB down region.
99% of the transmitted energy is contained within a bandwidth ≤ 1.2 x
(Symbol Rate).
1. While in this menu, press <ENTER> to turn OFF the TX-IF Output.
2. Press <ENTER> a second time to turn ON the TX-IF OUTPUT.
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata c.doc
1
Errata B
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to Table 2-4. Modulator Specifications
Date:
Document:
July 9, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020.EB7
Attach this page to page 2-5
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for Table 2-4. This information will be
incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
Table 2-4. Modulator Specifications (Continued)
Modulation, Coding
Moniotr & Control Characteristics
Modulation Type: QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM
Code Rate (Viterbi/Trellis)
Spectral Inversion, DVB-1, DVB-2, 99% BW
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata b.doc
1
Errata E
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to BCS Remote Commands
Date:
Document:
July 9, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020.EE7
Attach this page to page A-21
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for BCS Parameters. This information will
be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
BCS Parameters
1 to 33
Parameter
Number
11
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Modulator Type
(ref. ‘MT_’command)
Description
p11 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, or ‘2’
(0=DVB-1, 1=DVB-2, or 2=DVB-99)
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata e.doc
1
Appendix A. REMOTE CONTROL
OPERATION
This appendix describes the remote control operation of the SDM-2020 Modulator.
•
•
Firmware number: FW/5613-1AG
FW/5613-2AG
Software version: 9.1.2
Remote controls and status information are transferred via an EIA-485 (optional
EIA-232) serial communications link. Commands and data are transferred on the remote
control communications link as US ASCII-encoded character strings. The remote
communications link is operated in a half-duplex mode.
A remote controller or terminal initiates communications on the remote link. The modem
never transmits data on the link unless it is commanded to do so.
Some commands and status information are interface-type dependent.
A.1
MESSAGE STRUCTURE
The ASCII character format used requires 11 bits/character:
•
1 start bit
•
1 parity bit (Not applicable to 8 information bit setup)
•
2 stop bits
•
7 information bits or 8 information bits
Messages on the remote link fall into the categories of commands and responses.
Commands are messages, which are transmitted to a satellite modem, while responses are
messages returned by a satellite modem in response to a command.
A-1
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
The general message structure is as follows:
•
Start Character
•
Device Address
•
Command/Response
•
End of Message Character
‘add’
If a command is issued remotely with the intent to change a modulator configurable
parameter, the ‘REM_’ command must be issued first. This is to avoid data collision if
one was to be changing data from the front panel while another was sending a remote
command at the same time.
The first exception to the rule is if a command was issued to check a parameter status.
The ‘REM_’ command would not be required first and a status would be returned
normally.
The second exception to this rule is if the ‘MCP_’ command is issued for program
configuration changes or a status request. When this particular command is issued with a
command string attached, the Modulator will automatically engage remote mode,
followed by the execution of the ‘MCP_’ command. While this command is being
processed, any key presses from the front panel are stored in a keyboard buffer and
executed after the MCP command is completed.
A.1.1
START CHARACTER
A single character precedes all messages transmitted on the remote link. This
character flags the start of a message. This character is:
A.1.2
•
“<” for commands
•
“>” for responses
DEVICE ADDRESS
The device address is the address of the one satellite modulator which is
designated to receive a transmitted command, or which is responding to a
command.
Note: Address 0 is reserved as a global address which simultaneously addresses all
devices on a given communications link.
Valid device addresses are 1 to 3 characters long, and in the range of 1 to 255.
Devices do not acknowledge global commands.
Each satellite modulator, which is connected to a common remote
communications link, must be assigned its own unique address. Addresses are
software selectable at the modulator, and must be in the range of 1 to 255.
A-2
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.1.3
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
COMMAND/RESPONSE
The command/response portion of the message contains a variable-length character
sequence, which conveys command and response data.
If a satellite modulator receives a message addressed to it, which does not match the
established protocol or cannot be implemented, a negative acknowledgment message is
sent in response. These acknowledgment messages are:
>add/?ER1_PARITY
ERROR'cr''lf']
(Error message for received parity errors.)
>add/?ER2_INVALID
PARAMETER'cr''lf']
(Error message for a recognized command which cannot be
implemented or has parameters which are out of range.)
>add/?ER3_UNRECOGNIZABLE
COMMAND'cr''lf']
(Error message for unrecognizable command or bad
command syntax.)
>add/?ER4_MODEM IN LOCAL
MODE'cr''lf']
(Modem in local error; send the REM command to go to
remote mode.)
>add/?ER5_HARD CODED
PARAMETER'cr''lf']
(Error message indicating that the parameter is hardware
dependent and may not be changed remotely.)
Note: “add” is used to indicate a valid 1 to 3 character device address in the range
between 1 and 255.
A-3
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.1.4
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
END CHARACTER
A single character signals the end of each message:
•
“cr”
Carriage return character for commands
•
“lf”
Line feed
•
“]”
End bracket for responses
A-4
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2
A.2.1
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Frequency
RF Output
(IF Output)
Modulator
Rate
Assignment
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CONFIGURATION COMMANDS/RESPONSES
MODULATOR CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
>add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
RF_OFF'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MF_'cr'
>add/MF_nnn.nnnn'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RF_xxx'cr'
>add/RF_xxx'cr'lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RF_'cr'
>add/RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/AMRV_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
>add/AMRV_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/AMRV_'cr'
>add/AMRV_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: nnn.nnnn = Frequency in MHz,
50.0000 to 180.0000 in 2.5 kHz steps.
Note: When the modulator frequency is
programmed, the RF output is switched
off.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where:
nnnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2) [Coder rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), 5/6 (QPSK
5/6), 2/3 (QPSK 2/3), 8P23 (8PSK 2/3),
8P56 (8PSK 5/6), 8P89 (8PSK 8/9),
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4), 16Q78 (16QAM
7/8).
mmm.mmmmmm = Data rate in MHz.
Note: When using a SMPTE 310M
interface, the data rate is fixed at
19.392658 MHz. While the code rate can
be changed as applicable, an invalid
parameter message will be generated if
any other data rate is input for change.
A-5
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Symbol Rate
Assignment
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ASR_nnnnn_mm.mmmmmm'cr'
>add/ASR_nnnnn_mm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASR_'cr'
>add/ASR_nnnnn_mm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
nnnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2) [Code rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4), 7/8 (QPSK 7/8), 5/6 (QPSK
5/6), 2/3 (QPSK 2/3), 8P23 (8PSK 2/3),
8P56 (8PSK 5/6), 8P89 (8PSK 8/9),
16Q34 (16QAM 3/4), 16Q78 (16QAM
7/8).
mm.mmmmmm = Symbol rate in MHz.
Note: When using a SMPTE 310M
interface, the data rate is fixed at
19.392658 MHz. While the code rate can
be changed as applicable, an invalid
parameter message will be generated if
any other data rate is input for change.
Set
Modulator
Output
Power Level
Command:
Response:
<add/MOP_snn.n'cr'
>add/MOP_snn.n'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MOP_'cr'
>add/MOP_snn.n'cr''lf']
Scrambler
Enable
Command:
Response:
<add/SE_xxx'cr'
>add/SE_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/SE_'cr'
>add/SE_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/MSR_xxx'cr'
>add/MSR_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MSR_'cr'
>add/MSR_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/COM_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/COM_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/COM_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/COM_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit IF
Output
Power-up
Condition
Command:
Response:
<add/TXPU_xxxx'cr'
>add/TXPU_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxx = LAST (last known state)
or OFF (OFF).
Status:
Response:
<add/TXPU_xxxx'cr'
>add/TXPU_xxxx'cr''lf']
This command selects the state that the
TX-IF Output will be at power up.
Set
Modulator
Power Offset
Command:
Response:
<add/MPO_snn.n'cr'
>add/MPO_snn.n'cr''lf']
Where: snn.n = +40.0 to -40.0 in 0.1 dB
increments.
Status:
Response:
<add/MPO_'cr'
>add/MPO_snn.n'cr''lf']
Note: The modulator power offset is
added to the nominal power level.
(Energy
Dispersal)
Modulator
Spectrum
Rotation
Carrier Only
Mode
A-6
Where: snn.n = -20.0 to +5.0 in 0.1 steps
(nominal range in dBm).
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
Where: xxx = NRM (normal spectrum) or
INV (inverted spectrum).
Where: xxxxxx = OFF, DUAL, OFFSET,
or CENTER.
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Type
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/MT_xxxx'cr'
>add/MT_xxxx'cr'lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/MT_xxxx'cr'
>add/MT_xxxx'cr'lf']
Comments
Where: xxxx = DVB1 or DVB2.
A.2.2 BULK MODULATOR CONFIGURATION
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Modulator
Config
Command
/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/BMC_p1,p2,p3,…..pn'cr'
>add/BCM_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf']
Comments
This command causes the modulator to be
programmed with supplied parameters. All
parameters are separated by a ',' except for
the last parameter which has the standard
command termination character ('cr').
Parameters that do not need to be changed
can be nulled (no data between commas).
Status:
Response:
<add/BMC_'cr'
<add/BMC_p1,p2,p3,…..pn'cr''lf']
Note: This is the only command that may
be issued without first invoking the remote
command ("<add/REM_"). The remote
command is part of the initialization of this
BMC_command. Status requests to not
require that the remote command be issued
at all.
Where'pn' is the last parameter returned.
A-7
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BMC
Parameters
1 to 33
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Description
1
Modulator Rate Assignment
(ref."AMRV_"command)
p1 = nnnnn-mmm.mmmmmm, code
rate/date rate in Mbps
2
Modulator IF Frequency
(ref. 'MF_' command).
p2 = nnn.nnnn, IF frequency in MHz
3
Modulator RF Output
(ref. 'RF_' command).
p3 = n, where n is 0 or 1 (0 = Off, 1 = On).
4
Modulator Output Power Level
(ref. 'MOP_' command).
p4 = snn.n, transmitter output power level in
dBm.
5
Modulator Power Offset
(ref. 'MPO_' command).
p5 = snn.n, transmitter power offset level in
dBm.
6
Carrier Only Mode
(ref. 'COM_' command).
p6 = n, where n is 0, 1, 2, 3
(0 = Off, 1 = Dual, 2 = Offset, 3 = Center)
7
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
(ref. 'MSR_' command).
p7 = n, where n is 0 or 1
(0 = NRM, 1 =INV)
8
TX Output Power-up Configuration
(ref. 'TXPU_' command).
p8 = n, where 'n' is '0' or ‘1’
(0 = Off, 1 = Last)
9
Modulator Type
(ref. 'MT_' command).
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
p9 = n, where 'n' is '0' or ‘1’
(0 = DVB-1, 1 = DVB-2)
Scrambler Enable
(ref. 'SE_' command).
p10 = n, where 'n' is ’0’ or ‘1’
(0 = Off , 1 = On)
Transit Clock Phase
(ref. 'TCP_' command).
p11 = n, where 'n' = ‘0’ or ‘1’
(0 = NRM, 1 = INV)
Transmit Data Phase
(ref. 'TDP_' command).
p12 = n, where 'n' = ‘0’ or ‘1’
(0 = NRM, 1 = INV)
Transmit 2047 pattern generator
(ref. 'ISP_' command).
Transmit Sync Select
(ref. 'SYNC_' command).
p14 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’
(0 = EXT, 1 = Data, 2 = Auto)
Transit Data Fault Mode
(ref. ‘ TDF_’command)
p15 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’
(0 = None, 1 = Data Stable, 2 = AIS)
Transmit Clock Activity Action
(ref. 'TCAA_' command).
DVB Framing Type
(ref. 'TDVB_' command).
18 through
22
Reserved
23 through
40
Interface Specific
p13 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’ or ‘1’
(0 = Off, 1 = On)
p16 = n, where 'n' is '0' or ‘1’
(0 = Fault, 1 = Alarm)
p17 = n, where n = '1' , ‘2’, ‘3’
(1 = 188, 2 = None, 3 = 204)
A-8
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.1
Parameter
Type
BMC
Parameters
23 to 40
RS-422 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
24
25
26
27
A.2.2.2
Parameter
Type
BMC
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
Interface Select Mode
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (DVB, 1 =530)
Interface Clock Mode
(ref. ‘ICLK_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Serial), '1' (Parallel).
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
CTS State Control
(ref ‘CTSS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
28
DM State Control
(ref. ‘DM_’command).
29 thru 40
Reserved
P28 = n, where n = ‘0’(Normal), ‘1’ (Invert)
LVDS INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
24 thru 40
Description of Arguments
Interface Clock Mode
(ref. ‘ICLK_' command).
Reserved
A-9
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (Serial), '1' (Parallel).
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.3
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI/RS-422 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
Interface Select Mode
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (RS422).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
CTS State Control
(ref 'CTSS_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
27
DM State Control
(ref 'DMS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
28
ST State Control
(ref 'ST_' command).
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
29
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p29 = n, where n = 'A' (A-Input), 'B' (B-Input).
30
ASI Loop Bandwith Control
(ref ‘ASLB_’command).
p30 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
31
Interface Loopback
(ref. ‘ILB_”command).
p31 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Off), ‘1’ (On).
32
Interface Loop Thru Control
(ref. ‘ILM_”command).
p32 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Off), ‘1’ (On).
33 to 40
Reserved
A-10
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.4
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
A.2.2.5
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI/LVDS INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
Interface Select Mode
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (LVDS).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (A-Input), '1' (B-Input).
27
ASI Loop Bandwidth Control
(ref 'ASLB_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
28
Interface Loopback
(ref ‘ILB_’command).
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
29
Interface Loop Thru Control
(ref ‘ILM_’command)
P29 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
30
ASI Link Mode Control
(ref ‘ASIA_’command)
P30 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Manual), ‘1’ (Auto)
31 and 40
Reserved.
SMPTE-310 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_’command)
Comments
p23 = n, where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON)
24
Interface Loopback
(ref ‘RTSS_’command)
p24 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Normal) or ‘1’ (Invert).
25
Interface Loopback
(ref: 'ILB_' command).
p25 = n, where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON).
26
RTS State Control
(ref “ILM_”command)
P26 = n where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON)
27 to 40
Reserved.
A-11
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.2.6
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
G.703 INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
24
25
26
A.2.2.7
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 40
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
TX Interface Coding Format
(ref ‘ICFT_’command)
Comments
p23 = n, where n = ‘0’ (AMI), ‘1’ (B3ZS), ‘2’ (HDB3),
‘3’ (B8ZS).
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_’command)
p24 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Off) or ‘1’ (On).
RTS State Control
(ref: 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Normal) or ‘1’ (Invert).
Interface Loopback
(ref “ILB_”command)
p26 = n where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON).
27
Interface Loop Thru Control
(ref ‘ILM_’command)
28 to 40
Reserved
p27 = n where n = ‘0’ (OFF) or ‘1’ (ON).
ECL/HSSI INTERFACE
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Description of Arguments
DTE TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'DTEM_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
24
DTE State Control
(ref “DTES_”command).
P24 = n, where n ='0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
25
DCE State Control
(ref “DCES_”command).
P25 = n, where n = '0' (zNormal), '1' (Invert).
26 to 40
Reserved.
A.2.3 BULK MODULATOR CONFIGURATION CHANGE STATUS
Parameter
Type
Bulk Modulator
Config
Change Status
Command/Status/
Response
Status:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/BMCS_'cr'
>add/BMCS_x'cr''lf']
Comments
The ‘x’ character is defined as follows:
‘@’ = No change since last BMC_ poll.
‘A’ = BMC_ response has changed since last
BMC_ poll.
This command indicates that a change has or has
not occurred on the BMC_ response since the last
BMC_poll.
A-12
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.2.4
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Modulator
Config
Errors
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
BULK MODULATOR CONFIGURATION ERRORS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/BMCE_'cr'
>add/BCM_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn40'cr''lf']
Comments
When the BCME_command is executed, the
host M&C will inspect all of the supplied
parameters of the Bulk Modulator Command
(BMC_) for failure. If any particular parameter
or any combination of parameters is invalid or
out of range, the resulting output error listing
will allow the user to evaluate which
parameters caused the error.
The output error listing is a series of 40
characters, which are either a 1 or a 0,
commas delimited. A listing of all 0 would
indicate that there were no errors. A 1 in
position 1 and position 17 might indicate that
the symbol range of the modulator was
exceeded (Data and Code Rate are
programmed in position 1 and framing type
which affects symbol rate would be position
17).
This command is a status request only, and is
cleared after another BMC_ command is
issued. The BMCE_command will alaways
report the status of all 40 parameters,
whether these parameters are used or
reserved.
Note: Parameters 23 through 40 are interface
dependent. Ensure to refer to the
BMC_command for the particular type of
interface that is installed in the modulator.
Where'pn40' is the last parameter returned.
A-13
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
A.2.5 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/TCP_xxx'cr'
>add/TCP_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TCP_'cr'
>add/TCP_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/TDP_xxx'cr'
>add/TDP_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TDP_'cr'
>add/TDP_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ISP_xxx'cr'
>add/ISP_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ISP_'cr'
>add/ISP_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/SYNC_xxxx'cr'
>add/SYNC_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxx = EXT (sync pulse), DATA (data
sync byte), AUTO.
Status:
Response:
<add/SYNC_'cr'
>add/SYNC_xxxx'cr''lf']
Note: Data is only allowed with the ASI/LVDS
interface operating in ASI mode.
Command:
Response:
<add/TDF_xxxx'cr'
>add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxx = NONE, DATA, AIS.
Status:
Response:
<add/TDF_'cr'
>add/TDF_xxxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/TDVB_xxxx'cr'
>add/TDVB_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TDVB_'cr'
>add/TDVB_xxxx'cr''lf']
Interface
Identification
Status:
Response:
<add/INID_'cr'
>add/INID_xxxxxxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxxxxxxxx = RS422, LVDS,
ASI_RS422, ECL_TX, G.703, SMPTE 310M,
ASI/LVDS, or UNKNOWN.
Interface Mode
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/ICLK_xxx'cr'
>add/ICLK_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = SER (Serial mode, CLK = Data
rate) or PAR (Parallel mode CLK = Data
rate/8).
Status:
Response:
<add/ICLK_'cr'
>add/ICLK_xxx'cr''lf']
Parameter Type
Transmit Clock
Phase
Transmit Data
Phase
Interface
Substitution
Pattern
DVB Sync
Selection
Transmit Data
Fault
DVB Framing
Type
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (normal clock phasing) or
INV (inverted clock phasing).
Where: xxx = NRM (normal data phasing) or
INV (inverted data phasing).
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Note: Transmit 2047 Pattern.
A-14
Where: xxxx = 188, 204, NONE.
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter Type
TX Clock Activity
Action
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
>add/TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TCAA_'cr'
>add/TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxxxx = ALARM or FAULT.
A.2.6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
Time Of Day
Date
Remote
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr'
>add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/TIME_'cr'
>add/TIME_hh:mmxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr'
>add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/DATE_'cr'
>add/DATE_mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/REM_'cr'
>add/REM_'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
hh = 1 to 12 (hours).
mm = 00 to 59 (minutes).
xx = AM or PM.
Where:
mm = 1 to 12 (month).
dd = 1 to 31 (day).
yy = 00 to 99 (year) in 2-digit year mode.
yyyy = 1975 to 1999, and 2000 to 2075 in 4digit mode.
Configures the Modem for remote operation.
The modulator will respond to any status
request at any time. However, the modulator
must be in 'Remote Mode' to change
configuration parameters.
Clear Stored
Faults
Command:
Response:
<add/CLSF_'cr'
>add/CLSF_'cr''lf']
This command is used to clear all stored faults
logged by the modulator.
Save Mod
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/SMC_nn'cr'
>add/SMC_nn'cr''lf']
Where: n = 1, 2, 3, ..., 10 (stored configuration
number).
This command saves the current mod
configuration for recall at a later time using the
'RMC_' command. Up to ten different mod
configurations can be saved.
Recall Mod
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/RMC_nn'cr'
>add/RMC_nn'cr''lf']
Where: n = 1, 2, 3, ..., 10 (stored configuration
number).
This command causes the mod to be
reprogrammed with configuration parameters
previously saved using the 'SMC_' command.
One of 10 saved configurations can be
specified.
A-15
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Alarm Relay
State
A.3
A.3.1
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Rate
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ARLY_xxx'cr'
>add/ARLY_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV
(inverted sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/ARLY_'cr'
>add/ARLY_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the
Mod alarm relay (NC and NO contacts).
STATUS COMMANDS/RESPONSES
CONFIGURATION STATUS
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/MR_'cr'
>add/MR_nnnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
nnnnn = 1/2 (QPSK 1/2) [Coder rate], 3/4
(QPSK 3/4)
7/8 (QPSK 7/8), 5/6 (QPSK 5/6), 2/3 (QPSK
2/3), 8P23 (8PSK 2/3), 8P56 (8PSK 5/6),
8P89 (8PSK 8/9), 16Q34 (16QAM 3/4), 16Q78
(16QAM 7/8).
mmm.mmmmmm = Data rate in MHz.
Note: When using a SMPTE 310M interface,
the data rate is fixed at 19.392658 MHz. While
the code rate can be changed as applicable,
an invalid parameter message will be
generated if any other data rate is input for
change.
A-16
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Modulator
Config.
Status
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MCS_'cr'
>add/MCS_'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
AMRA_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
AMRV_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
RF Output (ON/OFF)
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Rate
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Carrier Only Mode
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
The Modulator configuration status command
causes a block of data to be returned by the
addressed mod. The block of data reflects the
current configuration status of the modulator
module. Additional configuration status of new
options and features will always be appended
to the end.
Modulator/
Coder
Config.
Program
Status
Interface
Config.
Status
Modem
Faults
Status
(Summary)
Modulator
Status
Note: This command is used by Comtech EFData M:N protection switch to collect information that is necessary
to configure back-up modulators. Because this command (content and/or order) can be changed at any time by
Comtech EFData, it is advisable that other commands (“MCS_”, “ICS_”, or “BCS_”) be used for M&C systems.
This command varies depending on the installed interface. The command is located in the interface sections.
Note: The interface configuration status command causes a block of data to be returned by the addressed
MODEM. The block reflects the current configuration of the interface. Additional configuration status of new
options and features will always be appended to the end. This command varies depending on the installed
interface. This command is located in the interface sections.
Command:
<add/MFS_'cr'
Response:
>add/MFS_'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
Modulator (FLT/OK)
ITX_xxx'cr'
Interface Transmit Side (FLT/OK)
CEQ_xxx'cr''lf']
Common Equipment (FLT/OK)
Command:
Response:
<add/MS_'cr'
>add/MS_'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
DCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
AGC_xxx'cr'
IF_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
RF Output (ON/OFF) Actual status not config.
Module (OK/FLT)
IF Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
Data Clock Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
I Channel (OK/FLT)
Q Channel (OK/FLT)
AGC Level (OK/FLT)
IF Module Fault (OK/FLT)
Configuration Fault (OK/FLT)
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
A-17
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Interface
Status
A.4
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/ITXS_'cr'
>add/ITXS_'cr'
FSYN_xxx'cr'
TXD_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
FIFO_xxx'cr'
INT_xxx'cr'
DF_xxx'cr'
VSYN_xxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr''lf']
Comments
Frame Sync Lock (OK/FLT)
Transmit Data (OK/FLT)
Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock (OK/FLT)
Transmit Clock Activity (OK/FL)
Transmit FIFO (OK/FLT)
Interface Module (OK/FLT)
Data Format (OK/FLT)
Video Frame Sync (OK/FLT)
Number of Stored Faults Logged (0 to 10)
COMMON EQUIPMENT STATUS
This common equipment status command causes a block of data to be returned which
indicates the status of the common equipment .
Parameter Type
Common Equipment
Status
A.5
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/CES_’’ cr’
>add/CES_’cr’
M&C_xxx'cr'
BAT_xxx'cr'
+5_xxx'cr'
+12_xxx'cr'
-12_xxx'cr'
MODE_xxxxxx'cr'
SFLT_xx'cr'’If”]
Comments
Monitor & Control Module (OK/FLT)
Battery/Clock (OK/FLT)
+5 volt power supply (OK/FLT)
+12 volt power supply (OK/FLT)
-12 volt power supply (OK/FLT)
Mode (LOCAL or REMMOTE)
Number of stored faults logged (0 to 10)
STORED FAULTS STATUS
Information on stored faults is returned when requested. If no stored fault exists for a
given fault number, the words “NO Fault” will be returned instead of the normal
time/date status information. The following symbols are commonly used to define the
stored faults status commands:
#
hh
mm
ss
MM
DD
YY or YYYY
Fault number (0 to 9). “0” is the first fault stored.
Hours in 24-hr. format.
Minutes.
Seconds.
Month.
Day.
Year (2- or 4-digits)
A-18
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter Type
Modulator Stored Faults
Interface Transmit Side
Stored Faults
Common Equipment
Stored Faults
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MSF_#'cr'
>add/MSF_# hh:mm:ss
MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
MOD_xxx'cr'
SYN_xxx'cr'
DCS_xxx'cr'
ICH_xxx'cr'
QCH_xxx'cr'
AGC_xxx'cr'
IF_xxx'cr'
CONF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ITSF_#'cr'
>add/ITSF_# hh:mm:ss
MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
FSYN_xxx'cr'
TXD_xxx'cr'
PLL_xxx'cr'
CLK_xxx'cr'
FIFO_xxx'cr'
INT_xxx'cr'
DF_xxx'cr''lf']
VSYN_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/CSF_#'cr'
>add/CSF_# hh:mm:ss
MM/DD/YYYY'cr'
M&C_xxx'cr'
BAT_xxx'cr'
+5_xxx'cr'
+12_xxx'cr'
-12_xxx'cr''lf']
A-19
Comments
Module (OK/FLT)
IF Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
Data Clock Synthesizer (OK/FLT)
I Channel (OK/FLT)
Q Channel (OK/FLT)
AGC Level (OK/FLT)
IF Module Fault (OK/FLT)
Configuration (OK/FLT)
Frame Sync Lock (OK/FLT)
Transmit Data (OK/FLT)
Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock
(OK/FLT)
Transmit Clock Activity (OK/FL)
Transmit FIFO (OK/FLT)
Interface Module (OK/FLT)
Data Format (OK/FLT)
Video Sync (OK/FLT)
Monitor & Control Module (OK/FLT)
Battery/Clock (OK/FLT)
+5V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
+12V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
-12V Power Supply (OK/FLT)
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
A.5.1 BULK CONSOLIDATED STATUS
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Consol.
Status
Command/Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
Comments
<add/BCS_'cr'
>add/BCS_p1,p2,p3, . . . pn'cr''lf']
This command causes bulk mod status to
be returned. To reduce the length of the
response, message parameter data are
returned without identifiers. However,
parameter identification can be determined
by order of return. Each status parameter is
terminated with a ',' (comma) except for the
last parameter which has the standard
message termination sequence ('cr''lf']).
Most of the data returned is formatted the
same way as the single command status
request (refer to the appropriate portions of
this document in preceding sections).
Additional configuration status of new
options and features will always be
appended to the end.
A-20
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
1 to 33
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter
Number
1
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Modem Remote/Local mode
2
Modulator RF Output
(ref. 'RF_' command).
p2 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Off) or '1' (On).
3
Modulator IF Frequency
(ref. 'MF_' command).
p3 = nnn.nnnn, IF frequency in MHz.
4
Modulator Rate
(ref. 'MR_' command).
p4 = nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm, code rate/data rate in
Mbps.
5
Modulator Rate
(ref. 'ASR_' command).
p5 = nnnn_mm.mmmmmm, code rate/symbol rate in
Msps.
6
Modulator Power Offset
(ref. 'MPO_' command).
p6 = snn.n, transmitter power offset level in dBm.
7
Modulator Output Power Level
(ref. 'MOP_' command).
p7 = snn.n, transmitter output power in dBm.
8
Scrambler Enable
(ref. 'SE_' command).
p8 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
9
TX Output Power-up Configuration
(ref. 'TXPU_' command).
p9 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (last).
10
Carrier Only Mode
(ref. 'COM_' command).
11
12
13
14
Description
p1 = n, where 'n' is '0' (LOCAL) or '1' (REMOTE).
p10 = n, where 'n' is '0' (Off), '1' (Dual),' 2' (Offset),
or '3' (Center).
Modulator Type
(ref. 'MT_' command).
p11 = n, where 'n' = '0' (DVB-1) or '1' (DVB-2).
Transmit Clock Phase
(ref. 'TCP_' command).
p12 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM), '1' (INV), or '2'.
Transmit Data Phase
(ref. 'TDP_' command).
p13 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
Transmit Data Phase
(ref. 'TDF_' command).
p14 = n, where 'n' is '0' (None), '1' (Data stable), or
'2' (AIS).
15
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
(ref. 'ISP_' command).
p15 = n, where 'n' is '0' (off) or '1' (on).
16
Transmit Clock Phase
(ref. 'SYNC_' command).
p16 = n, where 'n' is '0' (EXT), '1' (DATA), or '2'
(AUTO).
17
DVB Framing Type
(ref. 'TDVB_' command).
p17 = n, where n = '1' (188), '2' (NONE), or '3' (204).
18
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
(ref. 'MSR_' command).
p18 = n, where 'n' is '0' (NRM) or '1' (INV).
A-21
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Number
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Description
19 and 20
Reserved.
21
Interface ID
(ref. 'INID_' command).
p21 = 'xxxxxxx', where xxxxxxx = Interface type.
22
Interface clock Mode
(ref. 'ICLK_' command).
p22 = n, where n = '0' (Serial) or '1' (Parallel).
23 to 32
Interface specific.
33
TX Clock Activity Action
(ref. 'TCAA' command).
p33 = n, where n = '0' (Fault), '1' (Alarm).
A.5.2 BULK CONSOLIDATED STATUS FAULTS
Parameter
Type
Bulk
Consol.
Status
Faults
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/BCSF_'cr'
>add/BCSF_abcdefghijklmnop'cr''lf']
Comments
This command causes all mod fault status to be
returned. To reduce the length of the response,
fault status is embedded into the bit structure of
the characters that are returned. Faults are
indicated by a binary 1 in the designated bit
position. Additional fault status of new options
and features will be appended to the end or use
existing reserved bits.
Character 'a': Modulator fault status character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Modulator module fault.
Bit 4 = RF output status, actual not
programmed status (1 = on, 0 = off).
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation
(0 to 10) of the number of modulator
stored faults.
Character 'b': Modulator fault status character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF Synthesizer.
Bit 4 = Data Clock Synthesizer.
Bit 3 = I Channel.
Bit 2 = Q Channel.
Bit 1 = AGC Level.
Bit 0 = Configuration.
Character 'c': Modulator fault status character 3.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = IF module.
Bit 4 through Bit 0 reserved.
A-22
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Command/
Status/
Response
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
Comments
Character 'd': Interface transmit side faults
character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Data Format Fault
Bit 4 = reserved.
Bit 3 through Bit 0 = Binary representation
(0 to 10) of the number of interface
transmit side stored faults.
Character 'e': Interface transmit side faults
character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Frame Sync Lock.
Bit 4 = Transmit Data Valid.
Bit 3 = Transmit Clock Activity.
Bit 2 = Transmit Synthesizer PLL Lock.
Bit 1 = Transmit FIFO.
Bit 0 = Interface module fault
Character 'f': Interface transmit side faults
character 3.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 through Bit 0 reserved.
Character 'g': Common equipment fault status
character 1.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = reserved.
Bit 4 through Bit 0 = Binary representation
(0 to 10) of the number of common
equipment stored faults.
Character 'h': Common equipment fault status
character 2.
Bit 6 = 1 always.
Bit 5 = Battery/Clock.
Bit 4 = +5V power supply.
Bit 3 = +12V power supply.
Bit 2 = -12V power supply.
Bit 1 = Monitor & Control Module.
Bit 0 = reserved.
A-23
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.5.3
Parameter
Type
Change
Status
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
CHANGE STATUS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/CS_'cr'
>add/CS_x'cr''lf']
Comments
Where 'x' =
'@' = NO change since last BCS_ and BCSF_ polls.
'A' = BCS_ response has changed since last BCS_ poll.
'B' = BCSF_ response has changed since last BCSF_ poll.
'C' = Both responses have changed since last BCS_ and
BCSF_ polls.
This command indicates that a change has or has not occurred
on either the BCS_ or the BCSF_ response since the last
BCS_ or BCSF_ poll.
A.5.4
Parameter
Type
Equipment Type
UTILITY SYSTEM STATUS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ET_'cr'
>add/ET_tttttttt_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
tttttttt = Equipment type.
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version.
This command returns the equipment type
and the software version of the addressed
device.
Monitor & Control
Firmware
Information
Command:
Response:
<add/MCFI_'cr'
>add/MCFI_'cr'
VER_xxx.yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddrr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number
(0.0.0 to 999.999.999).
nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
A-24
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Boot Firmware
Information
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/BFI_'cr'
>add/BFI_'cr'
Ver:_xxx_yyy.zzz'cr'
FW/nnnnnn-ddrr’cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Comments
Where:
xxx.yyy.zzz = Software version number
(0.0.0 to 999.999.999).
nnnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 999999).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Encoder Firmware
Information (EFI)
Command:
Response:
<add/EFI_'cr'
>add/EFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-ddrr'cr'
Mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Reed-Solomon
Firmware
Information
(RSFI)
Command:
Response:
<add/RSFI_'cr'
>add/RSFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-ddrr'cr'
Mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
dd = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Interface Firmware
Information
(As Required)
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-ddrr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
dd= Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
Modem Options/
Misc. Information
Command:
Response:
<add/MOI_'cr'
>add/MOI_'cr'
s,OEM_LCD'cr'
s,16QAM'cr'
s,8PSK'cr''lf']
Where:
s = 0 (Not Installed, Not Upgradable)
- = (Not Installed, FAST Upgradable)
+ = (Installed)
(- or +) OEM LCD option
(- or +) 16QAM Code Rate option
(- or +) 8PSK Code Rate option
State of Product
Command:
Response:
<add/SOP_’cr’
>add/SOP_’cr’
Product address: abc’cr’
Baud format: abc’cr’
Baud rate: rrrrr bps’cr’
Comm type: <var-string1>’cr’
<varstring2>’cr’’lf’]
A-25
Where: a = Number of data bits (7)
b = Parity type (O,E,N)
c = Number of stop bits (1)
rrrrr = baud rate (150, 300, 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14.4K,
19.2K)
<var_string1> = Variable length
strings explaining communication
hardware type:
RS-485, 2 wire
RS-485, 4 wire
RS-232
<var_string2> = Variable length
strings explaining the intention of
the product:
“Under normal system operation”
“REFLASH of BULK firmware
required”
“REFLASH of M&C firmware
required”
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
A.6
Parameter
Type
Interface
Select
Command
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
RS-422 INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description
of Arguments
<add/ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ISEL_'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
This command is used for multiple interfaces:
Where: Interface RS-422
xxxxxx = DVB or 530
Interface ASI/RS-422 xxxxxx = DVB or RS422
Interfae ASI/LVDS xxxxxx = DVB or
LVDS
This command selects which interface connector will
be used for data.
RTS TX-IF
Control
Mode
RTS State
Control
CTS State
DM State
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/CTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/CTSS_'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/DMS_xxx'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/DMS_'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
Where xxx = On or Off.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If ON is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned On if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults are
present). If OFF is selected, the TX-IF output will
operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where xxx = NRM (Normal) or INV (Invert).
This command controls the logic sense of the RTS
signal.
Where xxx = NRM (Normal) or INV (Invert).
This command control the logic sense of the CTS
signal.
Where xxx = NRM (Normal) or INV (Invert).
This command controls the logic sense of the DM
(DCS-ready) signal.
A-26
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Config.
ICS
Command
Config.
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description
of Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
CTSS_xxx'cr'
DMS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
CTSS_xxx'cr'
DMS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Interface Select
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DMS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Select
Interface Mode
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DM State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
A-27
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
Interface Select
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (DVB, 1 =530)
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref ‘RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
CTS State Control
(ref ‘CTSS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
27
DM State Control
(ref. ‘DM_’command).
28 thru 40
Reserved
P28 = n, where n = ‘0’(Normal), ‘1’ (Invert)
A.7
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Config.
LVDS INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of
Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
A-28
Comments
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
ICS
Command
Config.
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
A.8
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
23
thru
32
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of
Arguments
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
ASI/RS-422 INTERFACE COMMANDS
Description of Arguments
<add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ISEL_'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ASI_x'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASI_'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
ASI Loop
Bandwith
Select
Command
Command:
Response:
<add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/ASI_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASLB_'cr'
>add/ASI_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
RTS TX-IF
Control Mode
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
ASI Link
(Input) Select
Command
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Mode
TX Clock Activity Action
Reserved.
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Parameter
Type
Interface
Select
Command
Comments
Comments
Where: xxxxx = ASI or RS422.
This command selects which interface connector
will be used for data.
Where: x = 'A' (For A-Input) or 'B' (For B-Input).
Where xxxxxx = WIDE or NARROW
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults are
present). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output will
operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
A-29
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
RTS State
Control
CTS State
Control
DM State
Control
ST State
Control
Interface
Firmware
Information
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the RTS
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/CTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/CTSS_'cr'
>add/CTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the CTS
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/DMS_xxx'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/DMS_'cr'
>add/DMS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the DM
(DCE-ready) signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/ST_xxx'cr'
>add/ST_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (normal sense) or INV (inverted
sense).
Status:
Response:
<add/ST_'cr'
>add/ST_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the ST
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr'cr'
Mm/dd/yyyy'cr''If']
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
d = Firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A through ZZ).
A-30
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Config.
ICS
Command
Config.
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxxx'cr'
RTSS_xxxx'cr'
CTSS_xxxx'cr'
DMS_xxxx'cr'
ST_xxxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’’lf’]
Interface Select
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DM State Control
ST State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
ASI Loop BW (Wide/Narrow)
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
CTSS_xxx'cr'
DMS_xxx'cr'
ST_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr’
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’’lf’]
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Select
Interface Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
CTS State Control
DM State Control
ST State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
ASI Loop Bandwidth
A-31
Comments
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Parameter
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Interface Select
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
CTS State Control
(ref 'CTSS_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
27
DM State Control
(ref 'DMS_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
28
ST State Control
(ref 'ST_' command).
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
29
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p29 = n, where n = 'A' (A-Input), 'B' (B-Input).
30
ASI Loop Bandwith Control
(ref ‘ASLB_’command)
p30 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
31-32
Reserved
Description
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (RS422).
A.9 ECL/HSSI TX INTERFACE COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
DTE TX-IF
Control
Mode
DTE Status
Command
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/DTEM_xxx'cr'
>add/DTEM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/DTEM_'cr'
>add/DTEM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/EDTE_'cr'
>add/EDTE_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the DTE
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming DTE
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults are
present). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output will
operate normal ignoring the DTE signal.
Where: xxx = AVA (available) or UNA (unavailable).
A-32
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/DTES_xxx'cr'
>add/DTES_xxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = NRM (Normal Sense) or INV (Inverted
Sense)
Status:
Response:
<add/DTES_'cr'
>add/DTES_xxx'cr''lf']
This commands control the logic sense og the DTE
signal.
Command:
Response:
<add/DCES_xxx'cr'
>add/DCES_xxx'cr''lf']
Where: xxx = NRM (Normal Sense) or INV (Inverted
Sense)
Status:
Response:
<add/DCES_'cr'
>add/DCES_xxx'cr''lf']
This commands control the logic sense og the DCE
signal.
MCP
Command
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
DTEM_xxxx’cr’
TCAA_xxxxx’cr’
RF_xxx’cr’’If’]
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
DTE Mode Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF output (ON/OFF)
ICS
Command
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
DTEM_xxx’cr’
TCAA_xxxxx’cr’
DTES_xxx’cr’
DCES_xxx’cr’’If’]
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
DTE Mode Control
TX Clock Activity Action
DTE State Control
DCE State Control
Parameter
Type
DTE State
Control
DCE State
Control
A-33
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Command/
Status/
Response
23
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
DTE TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'DTEM_' command).
Comments
p23 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
24
DTE State Control
(ref “DTES_”command).
P24 = n, where n ='0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
DCE State Control
(ref “DCES_”command).
P25 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
26-32
Reserved.
A.10
G.703 COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
Interface
Loop-back
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ILB_xxx'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILB_'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ILM_xxx'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILM_'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ICFT_xxxx'cr'
>add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ICFT_'cr'
>add/ICFT_xxxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Loop
Thru Mode
Interface
Coding Format
Transmit
RTS TX-IF
Control Mode
RTS State
Control
Comments
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxxx = AMI, HDB3, B8ZS, or B3ZS.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults
are preset). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output
will operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command controls the logic of the RTS
signal.
A-34
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
Interface
Firmware
Information
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
MCP
Command
Configuration
Command:
Response:
ICS Command
Configuration
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_xxx'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf'']
Comments
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
d = firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr''
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-Thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
A-35
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Para
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
TX Interface Coding Format
(ref: 'ICFT_' commands).
24
Interface Loopback
(ref: 'ILB_' command).
p24 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
25
Interface Loop Thru
(ref: 'ILM_' command).
p25 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
26 thru 32
Reserved.
Description
p23 = n, where n is 0 (AMI), 1, (B3ZS), 2 (HDB3), or 3
(B8ZS).
A.11
SMPTE 310M COMMANDS
Parameter
Type
Interface
Loop-back
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ILB_xxx'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILB_'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ILM_xxx'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILM_'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_xxx'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr'cr'
mm/dd/yyyy'cr''lf'']
Interface Loop
Thru Mode
RTS TX-IF
Control Mode
RTS State
Control
Interface
Firmware
Information
Comments
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If 'ON' is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be turned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed ON and no major modulator faults
are preset). If 'OFF' is selected, the TX-IF output
will operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where: xxx = ON or OFF.
This command controls the logic of the RTS
signal.
Where:
nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535).
d = firmware dash number (0 to 99).
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ).
A-36
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Parameter
Type
MCP
Command
Configuration
ICS Command
Configuration
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Description of Arguments
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr''lf']
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr''
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ILB_xxx'cr'
ILM_xxx'cr'
ICFT_xxxx'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Mode
Interface Loop Back
Interface Loop-Thru Mode
Interface Coding Format Transmit
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
A-37
Comments
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
A.12
Parameter
Type
Interface
Loopback
Interface
Loop-Thru
Mode
Interface
Select
Command
ASI Link
(Input)
Select
Command
ASI Link
Mode
Select
Command
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
Para
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Interface Loopback
Description
p23 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON)
24
Interface Loopback
p24 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
25
RX TX-IF Control Mode
(ref: 'RTSM_' command).
p25 = n, where n = 0 (OFF) or 1 (ON).
26
RTS State Control
(ref “RTSS_”command)
P26 = n where n = 0 (Normal) or 1 (Invert)
27 to 32
Reserved.
ASI/LVDS INTERFACE COMMANDS
Command/
Status/
Response
Command:
Response:
Description of Arguments
<add/ILB_xxx'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/ILB_'cr'
>add/ILB_xxx'cr''lf']
<add/ILM_xxx'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ILM_'cr'
>add/ILM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
Where xxxxx = ASI or LVDS
Status:
Response:
<add/ISEL_'cr'
>add/ISEL_xxxxx'cr''lf']
This command selects which interface connector
will be used for data.
Command:
Response:
<add/ASI_x'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
Where: x= A-Input or B-Input
Status:
Response:
Command:
Response:
<add/ASI_'cr'
>add/ASI_x'cr''lf']
<add/ASLA_xxxx’cr'
>add/ASLA_xxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASLA_'cr'
>add/ASLA_xxxx'cr''lf']
Comments
Where: xxx = On or Off.
Where: x = On or Off.
Where: xxxx = ‘MAN” (For Manual Input Select) or
‘Auto’ (For Auto Input Select)
A-38
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
ASI Loop
Bandwidth
Select
Command
Command:
Response:
<add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr'
>add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/ASLB_'cr'
>add/ASLB_xxxxxx'cr''lf']
RTS TX-IF
Control
Mode
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSM_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSM_'cr'
>add/RTSM_xxx'cr''lf']
Command:
Response:
<add/RTSS_xxx'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command configures the modem for the RTS
TX-IF control mode. If ‘ON’ is selected, the TX-IF
output will only be tuned on if the incoming RTS
signal is asserted (also the TX-IF output has to be
programmed On and No Major modulator faults
are presented. If ‘Off” is s elected, the TX-IF output
will operate normal ignoring the RTS signal.
Where: xxx = NRM (normal Sense) ot INV
(inverted Sense)
Status:
Response:
<add/RTSS_'cr'
>add/RTSS_xxx'cr''lf']
This command controls the logic sense of the RTS
signal.
Interface
Firmware
Information
Command:
Response:
<add/IFI_'cr'
>add/IFI_'cr'
FW/nnnnn-drr’cr’
mm/dd/yyyy’cr’’lf’]
Where: nnnnn = Firmware number (0 to 65535)
d = Firmware dash number (0 to 99)
rr = Firmware revision (-, or A to ZZ)
IJ1
Interface
Jumper #1
Setting
MCP
Command
Config.
Command:
Response:
<add/IJ1_'cr'
>add/IJ1_xx'cr'’lf’]
Where xx = TX or RX (LVDS)
Command:
Response:
<add/MCP_'cr'
>add/MCP_'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
MF_nnn.nnnn'cr'
MR_nnnn_mmm.mmmmmm'cr'
MPO_snn.n'cr'
MOP_snn.n'cr'
SE_xxx'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
MSR_xxx'cr'
MT_xxxx'cr'
TXPU_xxxxx'cr'
COM_xxxxxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxxx'cr'
RTSS_xxxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr'
RF_xxx'cr'
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’
ASIA_xxxx’cr’’lf]
RTS State
Control
Where: xxxxxx = Wide or Narrow.
Where: xxx = On or Off.
A-39
Interface Select
Interface Mode
DVB Framing Type
Modulator Frequency
Modulator Rate
Modulator Power Offset
Modulator Output Power
Scrambler Enable (ON/OFF)
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit Data Fault
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Modulator Spectrum Rotation
Modulator Type
Transmit IF Output Power-up Configuration
Carrier Only Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
RF Output (ON/OFF)
ASI Loop BW (Wide/Narrow)
ASI Link Mode (MAN/AUTO)
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
ICS
Command
Config.
BCS
Parameters
23 to 32
Command:
Response:
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
<add/ICS_'cr'
>add/ICS_'cr'
TCP_xxx'cr'
TDP_xxxx'cr'
ISP_xxx'cr'
SYNC_xxxx'cr'
TDF_xxxx'cr'
TDVB_xxxx'cr'
INID_xxxxxxxxx'cr'
ISEL_xxxxxx'cr'
ICLK_xxx'cr'
ASI_x'cr'
RTSM_xxx'cr'
RTSS_xxx'cr'
TCAA_xxxxx'cr’
ASLB_xxxxxx’cr’
IJ1_xx’cr’
ASIA_xxxx’’lf’]
Transmit Clock Phase
Transmit Data Phase
Transmit 2047 Pattern Generator
Transmit Sync Select
Transmit Data Fault
DVB Framing Type
Interface Identification
Interface Select
Interface Mode
ASI Input
RTS Mode Control
RTS State Control
TX Clock Activity Action
ASI Loop Bandwidth
Interface Jumper Position #1
ASI Link Mode (MAN/AUTO)
Para
Number
23
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Interface Select
(ref. 'ISEL_' command).
24
RTS TX-IF Control Mode
(ref. 'RTSM_' command).
p24 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
25
RTS State Control
(ref 'RTSS_' command).
p25 = n, where n = '0' (Normal), '1' (Invert).
26
ASI Input Control
(ref 'ASI_' command).
p26 = n, where n = '0' (A-Input), '1' (B-Input).
27
ASI Loop Bandwidth Control
(ref 'ASLB_' command).
p27 = n, where n = '0' (Wide), '1' (Narrow).
28
Interface Loopback
p28 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
29
Interface Loop Thru
p29 = n, where n = '0' (Off), '1' (On).
30
Interface Jumper #1
p30 = n, where n = ‘0’ RX LVDS), ‘1’ (TX LVDS )
31
ASI Link Mode
(ref ‘ASIA_’command)
p31 = n, where n = ‘0’ (Manual), ‘1’ (Auto)
32
Reserved.
A-40
Description
p23 = n, where n = '0' (ASI), '1' (LVDS).
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
A.13 ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY OPTION
The OEM LCD option permits the user to specify three pieces of information in the
equipment.
Lines 1 and 2 of the LCD display.
The identification of the unit when the remote port is interrogated for “equipment
type.”
If the manufacturer is to program this data into the equipment prior to delivery, the user
must specify the three strings. The manufacturer requires the string information ( as
specified in Column 4). The instructions for programming of the data via the equipment's
remote port is as follows:
Command/
Response
Command:
Response:
Remote Specification
<add/OES1_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr'
>add/OES1_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Status:
Response:
<add/OES1_'cr'
>add/OES1_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Program
OEM
String 2
(Notes 1
and 2)
Command:
Response:
<add/OES2_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr'
>add/OES2_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Status:
Response:
<add/OES2_'cr'
>add/OES2_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Program
OEM
String 3
Command:
Response:
<add/OES3_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr'
>add/OES3_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''lf']
Status:
Response:
<add/OES3_'cr'
>add/OES3_xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx'cr''If']
Parameter
Program
OEM
String 1
(Note 1)
(Note 3)
String Information
Where : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx =
16-character string to be displayed
on Line 1 of the modem LCD.
Where : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx =
16-character string to be displayed
on Line 2 of the modem LCD.
Where :
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
= 32-character string returned
when the ET_ (equipment type)
command is executed via the
remote port.
Notes:
1. A space in the display is created by the exponent character (^) in the string.
2. If a single question mark (?) is used as the OEM string 2, then the current version of the
M&C firmware is displayed. This is the usual entry.
3. Spaces are not allowed in OEM string 3. Use an underscore ( _ ) as a separator between
characters, see example:
Incorrect:
xxxx yyyy
Correct: xxxx_yyyy
4. FAST Upgrade Required
5. The <add/REM_ command shall be issued.
A-41
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator
Remote Control Operation
Revision 7
MN/SDM2020M.IOM
This page is intentionally left blank.
A-42
Errata A
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to Table 2-1. General Specification
Date:
Document:
July 11, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020M.EA7
Attach this page to page 2-1
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for Table 2-1. This information will be
incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
Table 2-1. General Specifications
Parameter
Spectral Shaping
Specification
DVB-1, square-root raised cosine, α = 0.35 per EN 300 421
and prEN 301 210
DVB-2, narrower than DVB-1. Substantically meets DVB
25% rolloff but not fully compliant.
99% BW, 99% of the transmitted energy is contained within
a bandwidth ≤ 1.2 x (Symbol Rate).
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata a.doc
1
Errata B
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to Table 2-4. Modulator Specifications
Date:
Document:
July 11, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020M.EB7
Attach this page to page 2-5
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for Table 2-4. This information will be
incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
Table 2-4. Modulator Specifications (Continued)
Modulation, Coding
Moniotr & Control Characteristics
Modulation Type: QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM
Code Rate (Viterbi/Trellis)
Spectral Inversion, DVB-1, DVB-2, 99% BW
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata b.doc
1
Errata C
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to 5.6.7.4 Utility: Modulator: Modulator Type
Date:
Document:
July 11, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020M.EC7
Attach this page to page 5-26
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for Paragraph 5.6.7.4. This information will
be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
5.6.7.4. UTILITY: MODULATOR: MODULATOR TYPE
MODULATOR TYPE
DVB-1
Use this menu to select a spectral mask type of DVB-1, DVB-2, or DVB-99:
DVB-1
DVB-2
99% BW
This is the default mask and is the “Best Fit” to the ETS 300 421 mask.
This mask has a sharper cutoff in the transition region from 3 to 40 dB
resulting in a narrower spectral, than DVB-1, at the 35 dB down region.
99% of the transmitted energy is contained within a bandwidth ≤ 1.2 x
(Symbol Rate).
1. While in this menu, press <ENTER> to turn OFF the TX-IF Output.
2. Press <ENTER> a second time to turn ON the TX-IF OUTPUT.
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata c.doc
1
Errata D
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to BMC Remote Commands
Date:
Document:
July 11, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020M.ED7
Attach this page to page A-8
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for BMC Parameters. This information will
be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
BMC Parameters
1 to 33
Parameter
Number
9
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Modulator Type
(ref. ‘MT_’command)
Description
p9 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, or ‘2’
(0=DVB-1, 1=DVB-2, or 2=DVB-99)
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata d.doc
1
Errata E
Comtech EF Data Documentation Update
Subject:
Changes to BCS Remote Commands
Date:
Document:
July 11, 2003
SDM-2020 Satellite Modulator Installation and Operation Manual,
Rev. 7, dated June 30, 2002
MN/SDM2020M.EE7
Attach this page to page A-21
Part Number:
Collating Instructions:
Comments:
The following changes provide updated information for BCS Parameters. This information will
be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
BCS Parameters
1 to 33
Parameter
Number
11
Parameter Name
(Command Reference)
Modulator Type
(ref. ‘MT_’command)
Description
p11 = n, where ‘n’ is ‘0’, ‘1’, or ‘2’
(0=DVB-1, 1=DVB-2, or 2=DVB-99)
s:\tpubs\manuals\released_word\modems\sdm2020m_rev7\errata e.doc
1
METRIC CONVERSIONS
Units of Length
Unit
Centimeter
Inch
Foot
Yard
Mile
Meter
Kilometer
Millimeter
1 centimeter
—
0.3937
0.03281
0.01094
6.214 x 10-6
0.01
—
—
1 inch
2.540
—
0.08333
0.2778
1.578 x 10-5
0.254
—
25.4
1 foot
30.480
12.0
—
0.3333
1.893 x 10-4
0.3048
—
—
1 yard
91.44
36.0
3.0
—
5.679 x 10-4
0.9144
—
—
1 meter
100.0
39.37
3.281
1.094
6.214 x 10-4
—
—
—
1 mile
1.609 x 105
6.336 x 104
5.280 x 103
1.760 x 103
—
1.609 x 103
1.609
—
1 mm
—
0.03937
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 kilometer
—
—
—
—
0.621
—
—
—
Temperature Conversions
° Fahrenheit
Unit
100
F = (C * 1.8) + 32
(water boils)
273.1
—
-459.6° Fahrenheit
C = (F - 32) * 0.555
(water freezes)
—
212° Fahrenheit
Formulas
0
—
32° Fahrenheit
° Centigrade
(absolute 0)
Units of Weight
Gram
Ounce
Avoirdupois
Ounce
Troy
Pound
Avoir.
Pound
Troy
Kilogram
—
0.03527
0.03215
0.002205
0.002679
0.001
1 oz. avoir.
28.35
—
0.9115
0.0625
0.07595
0.02835
1 oz. troy
31.10
1.097
—
0.06857
0.08333
0.03110
1 lb. avoir.
453.6
16.0
14.58
—
1.215
0.4536
1 lb. Troy
373.2
13.17
12.0
0.8229
—
0.3732
1 kilogram
1.0 x 103
35.27
32.15
2.205
2.679
—
Unit
1 gram
2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA
480 • 333 • 2200 PHONE
480 • 333 • 2161 FAX
">